advertisement
![JRC JMA-3411-4, JMA-3411-6 Instruction Manual | Manualzz JRC JMA-3411-4, JMA-3411-6 Instruction Manual | Manualzz](http://s2.manualzz.com/store/data/064348820_1-dffab0d511a6eace8866ebdf1ea1e26f-360x466.png)
MARINE RADAR
EQUIPMENT
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION
Cautions for High Voltage
High voltages, ranging from several hundreds to tens of thousands of volts, are used in electronic apparatus, such as radio and radar instruments. These voltages are totally harmless in most operations. However, touching a component inside the unit is very dangerous. (Any person other than authorized service engineers should not maintain, inspect, or adjust the unit.)
High voltages on the order of tens of thousand volts are most likely to cause instant deaths from electrical shocks. At times, even voltages on the order of several hundred volts could lead to electrocution. To defend against electrical shock hazards, don't put your hand into the inside of apparatus. When you put in a hand unavoidably in case of urgent, it is strongly suggested to turn off the power switch and allow the capacitors, etc. to discharge with a wire having its one end positively grounded to remove residual charges. Before you put your hand into the inside of apparatus, make sure that internal parts are no longer charged. Extra protection is ensured by wearing dry cotton gloves at this time. Another important precaution to observe is to keep one hand in your pocket at a time, instead of using both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a secure footing to work on, as the secondary effects of electrical shock hazards can be more serious. In the event of electrical shocks, disinfect the burnt site completely and obtain medical care immediately.
Precautions for Rescue of Victim
of Electric Shock
When a victim of electric shock is found, turn off the power source and ground the circuit immediately. If this is impossible, move the victim away from the unit as quick as possible without touching him or her with bare hands. He or she can safely be moved if an insulating material such as dry wood plate or cloth is used.
Breathing may stop if current flows through the respiration center of brain due to electric shock.
If the electric shock is not large, breathing can be restored by artificial respiration. A victim of electric shock looks pale and his or her pulse may become very weak or stop, resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity at worst. It is necessary to perform first aid immediately. i
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
Method of First-Aid Treatment
Precautions for First-Aid Treatments
Apply artificial respiration to the person who collapsed, minimizing moving as much as possible avoiding risks. Once started, artificial respiration should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Refrain from touching the patient carelessly as a result of the accident; the first-aider could suffer from electrical shocks by himself or herself.
(2) Turn off the power calmly and certainly, and move the patient apart from the cable gently.
(3) Call or send for a physician or ambulance immediately, or ask someone to call doctor.
(4) Lay the patient on the back, loosening the necktie, clothes, belts and so on.
(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.
(b) Check the heartbeat by bringing your ear close to the patient's heart.
(c) Check for respiration by bringing your face or the back of your hand to the patient's face.
(d) Check the size of patient's pupils.
(6) Opening the patient's mouth, remove artificial teeth, cigarettes, chewing gum, etc. if any.
With the patient's mouth open, stretch the tongue and insert a towel or the like into the mouth to prevent the tongue from being withdrawn into the throat. (If the patient clenches the teeth so tight that the mouth won't open, use a screwdriver or the like to force the mouth open and then insert a towel or the like into the mouth.)
(7) Wipe off the mouth to prevent foaming mucus and saliva from accumulating. ii
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a
Pulse Beating but Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration - Fig. 1
(1) Bend the patient's face backward until it is directed to look back. (A pillow may be placed under the neck.)
(2) Pull up the lower jaw to open up the airway. (To spread the airway)
(3) Pinching the patient's nose, breathe deeply and blow your breath into the patient's mouth strongly, with care to close it completely. Then, move your mouth away and take a deep breath, and blow into his or her mouth. Give rescue breathing twice in about 1 second and check if the chest rises.
(always with the patient's nostrils closed).
(4) Immediately, perform chest compressions.(perform uninterrupted chest compressions of 30 at the rate of about 100 times per minute.
With each compression, depress the chest wall to a depth of approximately 4 to 5 cm.) Rapidly, give 2 rescue breaths. Continuously perform the combination of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths without interruption.
(Perform the cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth respiration)
(5) Continue the cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth respiration until natural respiration is restored.
(6) If the patient's mouth won't open easily, insert a pipe, such as one made of rubber or vinyl, into either nostril. Then, take a deep breath and blow into the nostril through the pipe, with the other nostril and the mouth completely closed.
(7) The patient may stand up abruptly upon recovering consciousness. Keep the patient lying calmly, giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink (but not alcoholic drink) to keep him or her warm.
Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted
[1] (1) Lift the back part of the patient's head. Support the forehead with one of your hand and the neck with the other hand.
→
[1].
Many patients will have their airways opened by lifting their head in this way to ease mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration.
[2]
[3]
(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your mouth, press your cheek against the patient's nose
→
[2].
Alternatively, hold the patient's nose with your finger to prevent air leak
→
[3].
(3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.
Blow air into the patient's lungs until chest is seen to rise. (always with the patient's nostrils closed) Give rescue breathing twice in about 1 second and check if the chest rises.
Fig. 1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration iii
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
Treatment to Give When the Patient Has No
Pulse Beating and Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing cardiac massage - Fig. 2
If the patient has no pulse beating, with the pupils open and no heartbeat being heard, the patient has a cardiac arrest and requires immediate artificial respiration. Continue this until a medical specialist arrives, and follow his or her directions after that.
(1) Putting one hand on about the lower one third of the patient's ribs and the other hand over the back of the first, with your elbow fully stretched (with bended elbow, you can’t press to the extent the patie nt’s ribs are depressed), apply your body weight to the hands to press the patient's body until it is depress the chest wall to a depth of approximately 4 to 5 cm. (Chest compressions of 30 at the rate of about 100 times per minute.). (Cardiac massage)
(2) If only one first-aider is available, perform a cardiac massage about 30 times and then give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this sequence.
If two first-aiders are available, while one person performs a cardiac massage 30 times, the other should give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this sequence. (Combined cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration method)
(3) Check the patient's pupils and feel the pulse from time to time. When the pupils are restored to normal and the pulse begins to beat regularly, stop treating and keep the patient calm while giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink to keep him or her warm while watching him or her carefully.
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
Fig. 2 Cardiac massage
Procedure for Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) Using the AED iv
(Automated External Defibrillator)
A person is collapsing.
- Secure the safety of the surrounding area.
- Prevent secondary disasters.
Check for response.
- Call while tapping the shoulder.
Not responding
Ask for help.
- Make an emergency call.
Call an ambulance ( 911,119,112,999 etc)
- Ask to bring an AED.
Responding
Listen to the appeal of the injured or ill person and give the necessary first-aid treatment.
Open the airway.
- Check for breathing.
Not breathing
Give 2 rescue breaths; omit table Note ( 1 )
Give CPR.
- 30 chest compressions
- Give 2 rescue breaths; omit table Note ( 1 )
Arrival of an AED
- Turn on the power.
- Use the AED by following its voice prompts.
Fitting of the electrode pads, etc.
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
Breathing
Recovery position
- Lay the injured or ill person on his/her side and wait for the arrival of the emergency services.
Note(
1
) Omission of rescue breathing:
If there is a fear of infection because the injured or ill person has an intraoral injury, you are hesitant about giving mouth-to-mouth resuscitation, or preparing the mouthpiece for rescue breathing takes too long, omit rescue breathing and proceed to the next step.
Automatic electrocardiogram analysis
- Do not touch the injured or ill person.
Electric shock is needed.
The AED automatically analyzes the heart rhythm every 2 min.
Delivery of electric shock
Resume CPR from chest compressions by following the voice prompts of the AED.
Electric shock is not needed.
When to stop CPR
When the injured or ill person has been handed over to the emergency services or has started moaning or breathing normally, lay him/her on his/her side in a recovery position and wait for the arrival of emergency services. v
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
Procedure for Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) Using the AED
(Automated External Defibrillator) vi
1
.
Check the scene for safety to prevent secondary disasters
a) Do not touch the injured or ill person in panic when an accident has occurred. (Doing so may cause electric shock to the first-aiders.) b) Do not panic and be sure to turn off the power. Then, gently move the injured or ill person to a safe place away from the electrical circuit.
2
.
Check for responsiveness
Are you OK? a) Tap the shoulder of the injured or ill and shout in the ear saying, "Are you OK?" b) It the person opens his/her eyes or there is some response or gesture, determine it as
"responding." But, if there is no response or gesture, determine it as "not responding."
3
.
If responding
a) Give first-aid treatment.
4
.
If not responding
a) Ask for help loudly. Ask somebody to make an emergency call and bring an AED.
• Somebody has collapsed. Please help.
• Please call an ambulance . (Call 911,119,112,999 etc. by local number)
• Please bring an AED .
• If there is nobody to help, call an ambulance by yourself.
Please call an ambulance Please bring an AED.
5
.
Open the airway
a) Touch the forehead with one hand. Lift the chin with the two fingers of the middle finger and forefinger of the other hand and push down on the forehead as you lift the jaw to bring the chin forward to open the airway. If neck injury is suspected, open the airway by lifting the lower jaw.
6
.
Check for breathing
a) After opening the airway, check quickly for breathing for no more than 10 seconds. Put your cheek down by the mouth and nose area of the injured or ill person, look at his/her chest and abdomen, and check the following three points.
• Look to see if the chest and abdomen are rising and falling.
• Listen for breathing.
• Feel for breath against your cheek. b) If the injured or ill person is breathing, place him/her in the recovery position and wait for the arrival of the emergency services.
• Position the injured or ill person on his/her side, maintain a clear and open airway by pushing the head backward while positioning their mouth downward. To maintain proper blood circulation, roll him/her gently to position them in the recovery position in the opposite direction every 30 minutes.
Roll gently in the opposite direction every 30 minutes.
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
7
.
Give 2 rescue breaths (omittable)
a) If opening the airway does not cause the injured or ill person to begin to breathe normally, give rescue breaths. b) If there is a fear of infection because the injured or ill person has an intraoral injury, you are hesitant about giving mouth-to-mouth resuscitation, or getting and preparing the mouthpiece for rescue breathing takes too long, omit rescue breathing and perform chest compressions. c) When performing rescue breathing, it is recommended to use a mouthpiece for rescue breathing and other protective devices to prevent infections. d) While maintaining an open airway, pinch the person's nose shut with your thumb and forefinger of the hand used to push down the forehead. e) Open your mouth widely to completely cover the mouth of the injured or ill person so that no air will escape. Give rescue breathing twice in about 1 second and check if the chest rises.
CPR mask
Mouthpiece for
rescue breathing
8
.
Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) (combination of chest compressions and rescue breaths)
a) Chest compressions
1) Position of chest compressions
• Position the heel of one hand in the center of the chest, approximately between the nipples, and place your other hand on top of the one that is in position.
2) Perform chest compressions
• Perform uninterrupted chest compressions of
30 at the rate of about 100 times per minute
• While locking your elbows positioning yourself vertically above your hands.
• With each compression, depress the chest wall to a depth of approximately 4 to 5 cm. b) Combination of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths
1) After performing 30 chest compressions, give 2 rescue breaths. If rescue breathing is omitted, perform only chest compressions.
2) Continuously perform the combination of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths without interruption.
3) If there are two or more first-aiders, alternate with each other approximately every two minutes (five cycles of compressions and ventilations at a ratio of 30:2) without interruption.
Compress
with these parts
(the heels of
both hands).
30 times
2 times vii
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
9
.
When to stop cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)
a) When the injured or ill person has been handed over to the emergency services b) When the injured or ill person has started moaning or breathing normally, lay him/her on his/her side in a recovery position and wait for the arrival of emergency services.
10
.
Arrival and preparation of an AED
a) Place the AED at an easy-to-use position.
If there are multiple first-aiders, continue
CPR until the AED becomes ready. b) Turn on the power to the AED unit.
Depending on the model of the AED, you may have to push the power on button, or the AED automatically turns on when you open the cover. c) Follow the voice prompts of the AED.
Turn on the power.
11
.
Attach the electrode pads to the injured or ill person's bare chest
a) Remove all clothing from the chest, abdomen, and arms (male or female). b) Open the package of electrode pads, peel the pads off and securely place them on the chest of the injured or ill person, with the adhesive side facing the chest. If the pads are not securely attached to the chest, the AED may not function. Paste the pads exactly at the positions indicated on the pads, If the chest is wet with water, wipe dry with a dry towel and the like, and then paste the pads. If there is a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator (ICD), paste the pads at least 3cm away from them. If a medical patch or plaster is present, peel it off and then paste the pads. If the injured or ill person's chest hair is thick, paste the pads on the chest hair once, peel them off to remove the chest hair, and then paste new pads. c) Some AED models require to connect a connector by following voice prompts. d) Do not put child pads on adults (older than 8 years).
12
.
Electrocardiogram analysis
a) The AED automatically analyzes electrocardiograms. Follow the voice prompts of the AED and ensure that nobody is touching the injured or ill person while you are operating the AED. b) On some AED models, you may need to push a button to analyze the heart rhythm.
13
.
Electric shock (defibrillation)
a) If the AED determines that electric shock is needed, the voice prompt saying, "Shock is needed" is issued and charging starts automatically. b) When charging is completed, the voice prompt saying, "Push the shock button" is issued and the shock button flashes. c) The first-aider must get away from the injured or ill person, make sure that no one is touching him/her, and then press the shock button. d) When electric shock is delivered, the body of the injured or ill person may jerk.
Press the shock button. viii
FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
14
.
Resume cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).
Resume CPR consisting of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths by following the voice prompts of the AED.
15
.
Automatic electrocardiogram analysis
a) When 2 minutes have elapsed since you resumed cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR), the
AED automatically analyzes the electrocardiogram. b) If you suspended CPR by following voice prompts and AED voice prompt informs you that shock is needed, give electric shock again by following the voice prompts.
If AED voice prompt informs you that no shock is needed, immediately resume CPR.
16
.
When to stop CPR (Keep the electrode pads on.)
a) When the injured or ill person has been handed over to the emergency services b) When the injured or ill person has started moaning or breathing normally, lay him/her on his/her side in a recovery position and wait for the arrival of emergency services. ix
PREFACE & CHECKING THE SUPPLIED ITEMS
PREFACE
Thank you very much for purchasing the JRC marine radar equipment, JMA-3400 series.
This equipment is a marine radar equipment designed to obtain safe operation of marine ships. This equipment consists of a scanner unit and a display unit as its main units.
⚫ Before operating the equipment, be sure to read this instruction manual carefully for correct operation.
⚫ Maintain this instruction manual so that operators can refer to it at anytime.
Refer to this manual when any inconvenience or defect occurs.
About equipment type names:
JMA-3400 is a radar series model name.
Individual name is changed according with the combination of units.
JMA-3400 Series
JMA-3404
JMA-3406
JMA-3411-4
JMA-3411-6
Display Unit NCD-2364 + Scanner Unit NKE-2043
Display Unit NCD-2364 + Scanner Unit NKE-2063A/AHS
Display Unit NCD-2364 + Scanner Unit NKE-2103-4/4HS
Display Unit NCD-2364 + Scanner Unit NKE-2103-6/6HS
CHECKING THE SUPPLIED ITEMS
STANDARD SUPPLY ITEMS
Standard supply items are as follows.
Optional special length cables are prepared by JRC if request.
Option cable is provided with a length of 5m, 10m, 15m, 20m, or 30m. (Please order it if necessary)
SCANNER UNIT 1 set / DISPLAY UNIT 1 set
POWER CABLE (DC input cable 3m) 1 Piece
INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 Piece (This book)
NOTE:
This radar display is possible to use AIS, TT, LL_ position, Depth, and N-UP functions.
But those all functions need the signal input from GPS, AIS, GYRO, LOG, ECHO SOUNDERS.
ALL external signals are connected using NMEA cable. This cable is sold separately as an optional accessory, it is not included in the standard supply items.
OPTION UNITS (Not included in standard supplied items)
Please order to JRC agent or factory if necessary.
☆ SCANNER to DISPLAY Cable: 5m, 10m, 15m, 20m, 30m
☆ NMEA Signal connection cable: GPS, NMEA0183, NMEA2000
☆ Rubber cap for SCANNER to DISPLAY Cable x
BEFORE OPERATION
BEFORE OPERATION
PICTORIAL INDICATION
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on these equipment so that you can operate them safety and correctly and prevent any danger to you and/or to other persons and any damage to your property during operation. Such indications and their meanings are as follows.
Understand them before you read this manual.
!
DANGER
This indication is shown where incorrect equipment operation due to negligence may cause death or serious injuries.
!
WARNING
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly.
!
CAUTION
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly.
EXAMPLES OF PICTORIAL INDICATION
Electric Shock
The mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and
WARNING).
Detailed contents of CAUTION ("Electric Shock" in the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
The mark represents prohibition.
Detailed contents of the prohibited action ("Disassembling
Prohibited" in the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
Prohibited
Disassembling
Prohibited
Disconnect the power plug
!
Instruction
The mark represents instruction.
Detailed contents of the instruction ("Disconnect the power plug" in the example on the left) is shown in the mark. xi
BEFORE OPERATION
RUSSIA CTP MARK
According to the requirements of clause 20 of Technical Regulations about safety of Maritime transport objects, approved by Resolution of the Russian Federation Government #620 dated
August 12, 2010 and requirements Technical Regulation of the Russian Federation
Government #623 dated August 12, 2010 navigation & radiotelephone equipment should be marked by company – manufacturer with market-circulation mark the way it is determined by
Legislation of the Russia federation on technical regulation.
According to the article 27 PZ No184 –FZ of Federal Law about Technical Regulation dated
December 12, 2002 and Resolution of the Russian Federation Government dated 19.11.03
No0696 navigation equipment has an appropriate marking. The marking can be performed by one of four variants, depending on surface colour of equipment.
Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 1
The images should be grey scale and should contrast against the surface colour (ref. to the
Resolution of the Russian Federation Government No696 <<About market circulation mark>> dated November 19, 2003).
The marking of Radio and navigation equipment should be done by the manufacturer (supplier) according to the clause 2 of the article 27 of the Federal Law No.184 –FZ << About technical
Regulation>> and should be applied right to device surface. xii
WARNING STATEMENTS FOR INDUSTRY CANADA
BEFORE OPERATION
ENGLISH:
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
FRANÇAIS:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Microwave radiation level:
Keep away from a scanner when it is transmitting.
The high level of microwave is radiated from the front face of the scanner specified below. The microwave exposure at close range could result in injuries (especially of the eyes).
Item under test 50W/m 2 10W/m 2 2.5W/m 2
NKE-2043 NA 40cm NA
NKE-2063A NA 22cm NA
NKE-2103-4
NKE-2103-6
NA
NA
26cm
26cm
123cm
123cm
Information: https://www.canada.ca/en/health-canada/services/publications/health-ris ks-safety/limits-human-exposure-radiofrequency-electromagnetic-energ y-range-3-300.html#s2 xiii
BEFORE OPERATION
FRANÇAIS:
Micro-ondes niveau de rayonnement:
Tenir à l'écart à partir d'un scanner lorsqu'il transmet.
Le niveau élevé de micro-onde est rayonnée à partir de la face avant de l'analyseur décrit ci-dessous. L'exposition aux micro-ondes à courte portée peut entraîner des blessures (notamment des yeux).
Article en cours de test
50W/m 2 10W/m 2 2.5W/m 2
NKE-2043 NA 40cm NA
NKE-2063A NA 22cm NA
NKE-2103-4 NA 26cm 123cm
NKE-2103-6 NA 26cm 123cm
Information: https://www.canada.ca/en/health-canada/services/publications/health-ris ks-safety/limits-human-exposure-radiofrequency-electromagnetic-energ y-range-3-300.html#s2 xiv
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
DANGER
Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the equipment by users.
Inspection or repair work by unauthorized personnel may result in fire hazard or electric shock.
For inspection and repair work of equipment components, consult with our branch office, branch shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district.
When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the main power off.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution.
Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment. Especially when a rectifier is used, make sure to turn it off since voltage is still output from the rectifier even after the radar is turned off.
Failure to comply may result in equipment failure, electric shock or serious injury.
When conducting maintenance work on the antenna, make sure to turn its main power off.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution or injuries. xv
PRECAUTIONS
Never directly touch the internal components of the antenna, receiver/transceiver, or indicator.
Direct contact with these high voltage components may cause electrocution. For maintenance, inspection, or adjustment of equipment components, consult with our branch office, branch shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district.
Microwave radiation level:
Keep away from a scanner when it is transmitting.
The high level of microwave is radiated from the front face of the scanner specified below. The microwave exposure at close range could result in injuries (especially of the eyes).
Item under test 50W/m 2 10W/m 2 2.5W/m 2
NKE-2043 NA 40cm NA
NKE-2063A NA 22cm NA
NKE-2103-4 NA 26cm 123cm
NKE-2103-6 NA 26cm 123cm
Make sure to install the antenna at a place higher than human height.
Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body.
Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body. When it is necessary to get close to the antenna for maintenance or inspection purposes, make sure to turn the indicator power switch to "OFF" or "STBY."
When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn off the power and unplug the power connector J1 of the display unit so that the power supply to the equipment is completely cut off.
Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work without unplugging the power connector may result in electrocution, equipment failure, or accidents.
Do not take apart, and do not remodel the display unit. This could cause water to seep inside the display unit. xvi
PRECAUTIONS
A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar. In this case, the power should be turned on again.
Always use the automatic tuning mode.
Use the manual tuning mode only when the automatic tuning mode does not provide the best tuning state due to deterioration of magnetron for example.
If sensitivity is set too high, unnecessary signals such as noises in the receiver and false echoes increase to lower target visibility.
At the same time, if sensitivity is set too low, detection of targets such as ships and dangerous objects may be hindered.
Therefore, sensitivity must always be set to an optimal level.
When using the sea clutter suppression function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the sea surface at close range. Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited.
When using the sea clutter suppression function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level.
When using the rain/snow reflection suppression function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the rain or snow. Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited.
When using the rain/snow reflection suppression function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level.
Use the radar only as a navigation aid.
The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground.
Use the target tracking function (TT) only as a navigation aid.
The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the target tracking function (TT) information may cause accidents.
The target tracking function (TT) information such as vector, target numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors. Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be acquired or tracked.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground.
When a large value is set as an association condition, a tracked target near an AIS target is identified as the AIS target and may thus disappear from the display.
For example, when a pilot vessel equipped with the AIS function (a small target which is not a tracked target) goes near a cargo vessel which is a tracked target without the AIS function, the tracked target symbol for the cargo vessel may disappear. xvii
PRECAUTIONS
Since these alarms may include some errors depending on the target tracking conditions, the navigation officer himself should make the final decision for ship operations such as collision avoidance.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the alarm may cause accidents such as collisions.
When setting an automatic acquisition zone, make sure to properly adjust gain, sea-surface reflection suppression level, and rain/snow reflection suppression level so that the optimal target images are always on the radar screen. The automatic acquisition zone alarm will not be activated for targets undetected by the radar, and it may result in accidents such as collisions.
Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel.
Incorrect settings may result in unstable operation.
Do not make any adjustments during navigation. Failure to comply may result in adverse effects on the radar function which may lead to accidents or equipment failure.
Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel.
Failure to comply may result in accidents or equipment failure.
Make sure to shut off the main power before replacing parts.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution or equipment failure.
When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5 minutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution.
Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must get close to the magnetron. Failure to comply may result in damage to the watch since the magnetron is a strong magnet.
When cleaning the display screen, do not wipe it too strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the screen surface.
Do not take apart, and do not remodel the display unit. It may cause a fire, the electric shock, and the breakdown.
Before using a USB memory to read or write files, make sure that there are no computer viruses in the USB memory. If the display unit is infected with a virus, it may affect other equipment and cause a failure.
When removing the USB memory, check the USB memory access lamp to make sure that the USB memory is not being accessed before removing it.
If you insert or remove the USB memory during access, the data may be damaged and a failure may occur. xviii
PRECAUTIONS
The USB ports prepared on the front panel side and the back panel side are limited to a maximum of 500 [mA] based on the USB 2.0 standard.
If a device with a current consumption exceeding 500 [mA] is connected to this port for the purpose of charging electronic devices, etc., the current limit circuit may operate and the USB port may be temporarily unavailable.
Do not insert chart cards and data SD cards other than properly arranged new pec/Navionics+ into the CHART card slot.
If the display unit infects with a computer virus via SD card, it may affect other equipment and cause a malfunction.
The waterproof performance of the display unit is IPX5. For the operating conditions to guarantee this performance, refer to the integrated display unit waterproofing specification in Chapter 12 of this manual.
If the operating conditions are not observed, the waterproof performance is not guaranteed and may cause fire, electric shock, or failure. xix
WARNING LABEL MOUNTING POINT
WARNING LABEL MOUNTING POINT
Warning label is patched on the equipment visible surface.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.
NKE-2043 SCANNER UNIT
NKE-2063A/AHS SCANNER UNIT xx
WARNING LABEL MOUNTING POINT
NKE-2103-4/4HS/6/6HS SCANNER UNIT
NCD-2364 DISPLAY UNIT xxi
PACKING LIST
PACKING LIST
The packing lists of each unit are as follows .
NCD-2364
Packing List
[MTZ305402]
Display Unit
[NCD-2364]
Parts Name
Sun Cover
Figure Qty.
1
1
1
Name Plate
Readme
Simplified Manual (English edition)
[7ZPRD1010*]
Instruction Manual (English edition)
[7ZPRD1007*]
Power Cable
[CFQ-7758]
Template
Screw
Size6 × 25
Fuse
5A product : 2 pieces
10A product : 2 pieces
“ * ” means revision, such as A, B and so on.
xxii
1
7
4
1
1
1
1
1
NKE-2043: SCANNER UNIT
Parts Name
Packing List
[MTZ304378*]
Scanner Unit
[NKE-2043]
Mounting
Hardware
[MPXP34826*]
Bolt
[M8X30 SUS304]
Spring Washer
[SW8 SUS]
Washer
[W8 SUS]
Instruction for
Equipment
[MTZ304377*]
Template
[MTZ302447*]
Installation Cable (Option)
5, 10, 15, 20, 30m
[5m:CFQ-6912-5] / [10m:CFQ-6912-10] /
[15m:CFQ-6912-15] / [20m:CFQ-6912-20]
[30m:CFQ-6912-30]
[ST4-6.3AN1]
Scanner NKE-2043(DC12V)
For the compound modulator(F2)
JRC CODE: 5ZFCA00051
1 for installation / 3 for spares
[ST4-3.15AN1]
Scanner NKE-2043(DC24V)
For the compound modulator(F2)
JRC CODE: 5ZFCA00047
1 for installation / 3 for spares
“ * ” means revision, such as A, B and so on.
Figure
PACKING LIST
Qty.
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
1
4
4 xxiii
PACKING LIST
NKE-2063A/AHS: SCANNER UNIT
Parts Name
Packing List
[MTZ305173*]
Scanner Unit
[NKE-2063A/AHS]
Mounting
Hardware
[MPXP35725*]
Brass Washer
[MTL325583]
Built-in Upset Bolt
[M6X12SUS+SW+W]
Instruction for
Equipment
[MTZ305172*]
Installation Cable (Option)
5, 10, 15, 20, 30m
[5m:CFQ-6912-5] / [10m:CFQ-6912-10] /
[15m:CFQ-6912-15] / [20m:CFQ-6912-20]
[30m:CFQ-6912-30]
Earth Cable
[7ZCRD1501]
[ST4-6.3AN1]
Scanner NKE-2062(DC12V)
For the modulator(F2)
JRC CODE: 5ZFCA00051
1 for installation / 3 for spares
[ST4-3.15AN1]
Scanner NKE-2062/HS(DC24V)
For the modulator(F2)
JRC CODE: 5ZFCA00047
1 for installation / 3 for spares
[ST4-5AN1]
Scanner NKE-2062/HS
For the scanner motor(F3)
JRC CODE: 5ZFCA00050
1 for installation / 3 for spares
Carbon Brush
[54531-01]
“ * ” means revision, such as A, B and so on.
xxiv
Figure
4
4
2
1
4
4
4
1
1
Qty.
1
1
NKE-2103-4/4HS/6/6HS: SCANNER UNIT
Parts Name
Packing List
[MTZ303832*]
Scanner Unit
[NKE-2103-4/4HS]
[NKE-2103-6/6HS]
Mounting
Hardware
[MPXP34097*]
Brass Washer
[MTL325583]
Built-in Upset Bolt
[M6X12SUS+SW+W]
Instruction for
Equipment
[MTZ303800*]
Name Plate
[MPNN45926*]
Installation Cable (Option)
5, 10, 15, 20, 30m
[5m:CFQ-6912-5] / [10m:CFQ-6912-10] /
[15m:CFQ-6912-15] / [20m:CFQ-6912-20]
[30m:CFQ-6912-30]
Earth Cable
[7ZCRD1501]
[ST4-5AN1]
Scanner NKE-2103-4/4HS/6/6HS
For the modulator(F2)
JRC CODE: 5ZFCA00050
1 for installation / 3 for spares
[ST6-10AN1]
Scanner NKE-2103-4/4HS/6/6HS
For the power supply to motor(F3)
JRC CODE: 5ZFCA00053
1 for installation / 3 for spares
“ * ” means revision, such as A, B and so on.
Figure
PACKING LIST
Qty.
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
4
4 xxv
PACKING LIST
OPTION PARTS
Parts Name
Rectifier
[NBA-5111] for JMA-3404
JMA-3406/HS
JMA-3412-4/4HS/6/6HS
Rectifier
[NBD-865] for JMA-3404
JMA-3406
NMEA Cable for GPS
[CFQ-9002]
NMEA Cable for NMEA0183
[CFQ-5374]
NMEA Cable for NMEA2000
[CFQ-7765]
Rubber Cap for Installation Cable
[MTT317838*] new pec Chart Card
[CDD-812]
* JRC dedicated card
Navionics+ Chart Card
*Please consult with our sales office if you need them.
USB Memory
[UDG4-1GAR-JRC] xxvi
Figure Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Parts Name
Simplified Manual (Japanese edition.
For products sold in Japan)
[7ZPRD1009*]
Instruction Manual (Japanese edition.
For products sold in Japan)
[7ZPRD1006*]
“ * ” means revision, such as A, B and so on.
Figure
PACKING LIST
Qty.
1
1 xxvii
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
JMA-3400 is a series name.
Individual TYPE name is changed by combination of units.
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
TYPE
JMA-3404
JMA-3406
JMA-3411-4
JMA-3411-6
NCD-2364 + NKE-2043
NCD-2364 + NKE-2063A/AHS
NCD-2364 + NKE-2103-4/4HS
NCD-2364 + NKE-2103-6/6HS
JMA-3400 Series system diagram
2feet Scanner Unit
(NKE-2043)
Radome diameter 620mm
3.9feet Scanner Unit
(NKE-2063A/AHS)
Swing circle: φ1220mm
4feet, 6feet Scanner Unit
(NKE-2103-4/4HS/6/6HS)
4feet swing circle: φ1320mm
6feet swing circle: φ1910mm
Installation cable (option):
H-CFQ6912-5, 10, 20, 30
CFQ6912-15
LENGTH: 5m/10m/15m/20m/30m
External Signal input
NMEA1,2 port
NMEA3 port
Alarm output 1ch
LAN1 port
(echo output, etc.)
Ship’s Main Power
(10.8-31.2VDC)
12inch SVGA COLOR LCD DISPLAY
(NCD-2364)
NMEA2000 1port
JRC GPS 1port
DVI 1port (external monitor)
USB 1port (USB mouse, etc.) xxviii
NKE-2043 SCANNER UNIT
NKE-2063A/AHS SCANNER UNIT
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE xxix
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
NKE-2103-4/4HS/6/6HS SCANNER UNIT xxx
NCD-2364 DISPLAY UNIT
Front Panel
LCD Monitor
With Sun Cover
Sun Cover
Thumb position
USB/ Chart Card
Note : When you remove the sun cover do the thumb position push and the fingertip position pull at the same time action.
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
Function Buttons
Desk Top Mount
Fingertip position xxxi
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE xxxii
Fuse
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION .................................................................. i
WARNING LABEL MOUNTING POINT ................................................................ xx
1.2.3 DIMENSIONAL DRAWING OF DISPLAY MOUNTING ............................................... 3
1.2.6 EXTERNAL NAVIGATIONAL SIGNAL CONNECTION ............................................. 10
MOUNTING RACK AND MAST FOR THE SCANNER .......................................... 14
SCANNER AND THE SURROUNDING STRUCTURAL OBJECTS ..................... 14
1.3.6 CONFIRM MOUNTING BASE BEFORE INSTALL .................................................... 17
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION .................................................................. 33
xxxiii
CONTENTS
2.5.1 FUNCTION OVERVIEW OF MULTI CONTROL MENU ............................................ 43
Chapter 3 ADJUST THE RADAR ECHO ........................................................... 44
Chapter 4 VRM AND EBL FUNCTION ............................................................... 50
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS ..................................................................... 52
5.1 PARALLEL CURSOR FUNCTION ......................................................................................... 52
5.2 MOB FUNCTION (MAN OVERBOARD) ................................................................................ 55
5.3 ANCHOR WATCH FUNCTION .............................................................................................. 56
5.4 VECTOR LENGTH ................................................................................................................. 58
5.5 RADAR TRAILS ...................................................................................................................... 59
5.5.1 SETUP THE RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL .................................................................. 59
5.6 AIS OPERATIONS ................................................................................................................. 60
5.6.1 AIS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 62
5.7 TT OPERATIONS ................................................................................................................... 64
5.8 OFF-CENTER FUNCTION ..................................................................................................... 68
5.9 MARK FUNCTION .................................................................................................................. 69
5.10 LINE FUNCTION .................................................................................................................. 72
5.11 OWNSHIP MARK FUNCTION ............................................................................................. 75
5.12 USER OPTION KEYS .......................................................................................................... 77
5.13 MODE FUNCTION ............................................................................................................... 78
5.14 SETTING DISPLAY BRILLIANCE AND COLOR ................................................................ 80
5.15 CURSOR FUNCTION .......................................................................................................... 81
5.16 RADAR ECHO SETTING ..................................................................................................... 82
5.16.1 PULSE WIDTH .......................................................................................................... 83
5.16.2 IR (INTERFERENCE REJECTION) .......................................................................... 83
5.16.3 TARGET ENHANCE ................................................................................................. 84
5.16.4 PROCESS ................................................................................................................. 84
5.16.5 ZOOM MODE ............................................................................................................ 84
5.16.6 VIDEO NOISE REJECTION ...................................................................................... 85
5.16.7 VIDEO LATITUDE ..................................................................................................... 85
5.17 TUNE .................................................................................................................................... 86
5.18 MARKER ............................................................................................................................... 87
5.18.1 EBL SETTING ............................................................................................................ 87
5.18.2 PARALLEL CURSOR ................................................................................................ 88 xxxiv
CONTENTS
5.18.3 VRM UNIT .................................................................................................................. 89
5.18.4 CURSOR MODE ....................................................................................................... 89
5.18.5 RANGE RING ............................................................................................................ 90
5.19 SET OWN SHIP MOVEMENT ............................................................................................. 91
5.20 TRAILS SETTING ................................................................................................................. 92
5.20.1 THRESHOLD ............................................................................................................. 93
5.20.2 TIME/ALL COMBINE ................................................................................................. 93
5.20.3 TRAILS MODE ........................................................................................................... 93
5.21 VECTOR ............................................................................................................................... 94
5.21.1 VECTOR MODE ........................................................................................................ 95
5.21.2 DISPLAY OWN SHIP’S VECTOR ............................................................................. 95
5.21.3 OWN SHIP VECTOR LINE WIDTH .......................................................................... 95
5.22 OFFCENTER SETTING ....................................................................................................... 96
5.23 FUNCTION SETTING .......................................................................................................... 97
5.23.1 FUNCTION ENABLE/DISABLE ................................................................................ 98
5.23.2 AUTO STC/FTC ......................................................................................................... 98
5.23.3 TRAILS INTERVAL .................................................................................................... 99
5.23.4 ANTENNA HEIGHT ................................................................................................... 99
5.23.5 SAVE PRESENT STATE .......................................................................................... 99
5.23.6 INITIALIZE.................................................................................................................. 99
5.24 AIS/TT ................................................................................................................................. 100
5.24.1 FUNCTION ON/OFF................................................................................................ 101
5.24.2 CPA LIMIT ................................................................................................................ 101
5.24.3 TCPA LIMIT ............................................................................................................. 101
5.24.4 CPA RING ................................................................................................................ 101
5.24.5 TARGET NUMBER DISPLAY ................................................................................. 101
5.24.6 TARGET NUMBER ALLOCATION ......................................................................... 102
5.24.7 TLL TARGET NUMBER ALLOCATION .................................................................. 102
5.24.8 ALR ALARM FROM AIS .......................................................................................... 102
5.24.9 AIS DISPLAY TARGET ........................................................................................... 102
5.24.10 AIS DESTINATION SHIP ...................................................................................... 102
5.24.11 AIS RETRIEVED VESSEL .................................................................................... 102
5.24.12 AIS FILTER ............................................................................................................ 102
5.25 GUARD ZONE .................................................................................................................... 103
5.25.1 ZONE ALARM LEVEL ............................................................................................. 104
5.25.2 ZONE MODE ........................................................................................................... 104
5.25.3 MAKE ZONE ............................................................................................................ 104
5.26 WAYPOINT DISPLAY ........................................................................................................ 105
5.27 CHART ................................................................................................................................ 106
5.27.1 TYPE ........................................................................................................................ 106
5.27.2 DISPLAY .................................................................................................................. 107
5.27.3 SYMBOL .................................................................................................................. 107 xxxv
CONTENTS
5.27.4 PALETTE ................................................................................................................. 107
5.27.5 SHOW EXTEND DATA ........................................................................................... 107
5.28 SET CHART OPERATION ................................................................................................. 108
5.29 MARK SETTING ................................................................................................................. 109
5.29.1 MARK SIZE .............................................................................................................. 109
5.29.2 MARK COLOR ......................................................................................................... 110
5.29.3 MARK TYPE ............................................................................................................ 110
5.29.4 DISPLAY MARK COLOR ........................................................................................ 110
5.29.5 DISPLAY MARK TYPE ............................................................................................ 110
5.29.6 MARK LIST .............................................................................................................. 110
5.30 OWNSHIP MARK SETTING .............................................................................................. 112
5.30.1 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK SIZE ....................................................................... 112
5.30.2 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK COLOR .................................................................. 113
5.30.3 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK TYPE ...................................................................... 113
5.30.4 DISPLAY MARK COLOR ........................................................................................ 113
5.30.5 DISPLAY MARK TYPE ............................................................................................ 113
5.30.6 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK LIST ........................................................................ 113
5.31 LINE SETTING ................................................................................................................... 115
5.31.1 LINE COLOR ........................................................................................................... 115
5.31.2 LINE TYPE ............................................................................................................... 115
5.31.3 DISPLAY LINE COLOR ........................................................................................... 116
5.31.4 DISPLAY LINE TYPE .............................................................................................. 116
5.31.5 LINE LIST ................................................................................................................. 116
5.32 OWN TRACK SETTING ..................................................................................................... 118
5.32.1 OWN TRACK RECORD ON/OFF ........................................................................... 118
5.32.2 OWN TRACK RECORD DISPLAY ON/OFF .......................................................... 118
5.32.3 OWN TRACK COLOR ............................................................................................. 119
5.32.4 OWN TRACK TYPE ................................................................................................ 119
5.32.5 OWN TRACK INTERVAL ........................................................................................ 119
5.32.6 DISPLAY OWN TRACK COLOR ............................................................................ 119
5.32.7 DISPLAY OWN TRACK TYPE ................................................................................ 119
5.32.8 CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR/TYPE ..................................................................... 119
5.33 FILE OPERATION .............................................................................................................. 120
5.33.1 SAVE ........................................................................................................................ 120
5.33.2 LOAD........................................................................................................................ 120
5.33.3 DELETE ................................................................................................................... 121
5.34 SCREEN CAPTURE .......................................................................................................... 121
5.34.1 CAPTURE FUNCTION ............................................................................................ 122
5.34.2 SET MANUAL KEY .................................................................................................. 122
5.34.3 INTERVAL ................................................................................................................ 122
5.35 TIMED TX ........................................................................................................................... 123
5.35.1 TIMED TX ................................................................................................................ 123 xxxvi
CONTENTS
5.35.2 TX TIME ................................................................................................................... 123
5.35.3 STANDBY TIME ...................................................................................................... 124
5.36 TLL TX "USER2" ................................................................................................................. 124
5.37 CERTIFICATION INFORMATION ..................................................................................... 124
Chapter 6 OPTION AND OTHER FUNCTIONS .................................................. 125
6.1 NMEA CABLE ....................................................................................................................... 125
6.2 EXTERNAL MONITOR OUTPUT ........................................................................................ 128
6.3 RECTIFIER UNIT .................................................................................................................. 128
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS .......................................................................... 129
7.1 LANGUAGE SELECTION .................................................................................................... 130
7.2 BEARING ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................... 130
7.3 RANGE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................................ 130
7.4 TUNING ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................................... 131
7.5 ANTENNA HEIGHT SET UP ................................................................................................ 132
7.6 COMMUNICATION PORT SETUP ...................................................................................... 133
7.6.1 BAUD RATE .............................................................................................................. 134
7.6.2 RX SENTENCE ......................................................................................................... 134
7.6.3 RX PORT ................................................................................................................... 135
7.6.4 TX PORT .................................................................................................................... 135
7.6.5 TX DATA FORMAT ................................................................................................... 136
7.6.6 TARGET INFORMATION TX .................................................................................... 136
7.7 I/F DEVICE ............................................................................................................................ 137
7.7.1 HEADING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................ 138
7.7.2 MANUAL HEADING .................................................................................................. 138
7.7.3 SPEED EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................ 138
7.7.4 MANUAL SPEED ....................................................................................................... 138
7.7.5 MAGNETIC COMPASS............................................................................................. 138
7.8 JRC GPS ............................................................................................................................... 139
7.8.1 NMEA VERSION ....................................................................................................... 140
7.8.2 GPS SETTING ........................................................................................................... 141
7.8.3 BEACON SETTING ................................................................................................... 145
7.8.4 SBAS SETTING ......................................................................................................... 146
7.8.5 GPS STATUS DISPLAY ............................................................................................ 147
7.8.6 LORAN SETTING ...................................................................................................... 147
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS ............................................ 148
8.1 RADAR ECHO ...................................................................................................................... 148
8.1.1 NOISE LEVEL ............................................................................................................ 149
8.1.2 MAIN BANG SUPPRESSION ................................................................................... 149
8.1.3 TARGET ENHANCE LEVEL ..................................................................................... 150
8.1.4 GAIN ........................................................................................................................... 150
8.1.5 SEA ............................................................................................................................ 150
8.1.6 RAIN ........................................................................................................................... 151 xxxvii
CONTENTS
8.2 TRAILS .................................................................................................................................. 152
8.2.1 TRAILS SUPPRESSION DISTANCE ....................................................................... 152
8.2.2 MAX INTERVAL ......................................................................................................... 153
8.2.3 RANGE LIMIT ............................................................................................................ 153
8.3 TT .......................................................................................................................................... 154
8.4 SCANNER ............................................................................................................................ 155
8.4.1 SLOPE CORRECTION ............................................................................................. 156
8.4.2 PULSE REPETITION FREQUENCY FINE TUNING (PRF FINE TUNING) ............ 156
8.4.3 STAGGER TRIGGER ................................................................................................ 156
8.4.4 SCANNER ROTATION SPEED ................................................................................ 156
8.4.5 PRF OUTPUT MODE ................................................................................................ 156
8.4.6 SAFETY SWITCH ...................................................................................................... 157
8.4.7 TUNE PEAK ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................... 157
8.4.8 TUNE INDICATOR LEVEL ........................................................................................ 157
8.4.9 STOP ANTENNA IN THE SPECIFIED DIRECTION ................................................ 157
8.4.10 ICE CLASS STANDBY MODE ................................................................................ 159
8.5 CONTROL ............................................................................................................................ 159
8.5.1 MULTI CONTROL MENU TIME OUT ....................................................................... 159
8.5.2 CROSS KEY GAIN .................................................................................................... 160
8.5.3 MULTI CONTROL ..................................................................................................... 160
8.5.4 GAIN CONTROL/SEA CONTROL/RAIN CONTROL ............................................... 160
8.6 BUZZER ................................................................................................................................ 161
8.7 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................... 162
8.7.1 RESET PARTIAL ....................................................................................................... 163
8.7.2 RESET ALL ................................................................................................................ 164
8.7.3 SYSTEM TIME CLEAR ............................................................................................. 164
8.7.4 SCANNER TIME CLEAR .......................................................................................... 165
8.7.5 TABLE UPDATE ........................................................................................................ 165
8.7.6 INTERNAL SETTING ................................................................................................ 166
8.7.7 USB FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 168
8.8 SYSTEM SETTING .............................................................................................................. 169
8.8.1 MASTER/SLAVE/DEMO ........................................................................................... 170
8.8.2 OWN OUTLINE.......................................................................................................... 170
8.8.3 BARGE OUTLINE ...................................................................................................... 170
8.8.4 BEARING MARKER .................................................................................................. 170
8.8.5 OPERATION NUMERIC DISPLAY ........................................................................... 170
8.8.6 UNIT ........................................................................................................................... 171
8.8.7 MOVE OWN SHIP ..................................................................................................... 171
8.8.8 RANGE ...................................................................................................................... 172
8.9 DISPLAY SCREEN ............................................................................................................... 173
8.9.1 STANDBY NUMERIC DISPLAY ............................................................................... 174
8.9.2 DISPLAY COLOR ...................................................................................................... 174 xxxviii
CONTENTS
8.9.3 OPERATION NUMERIC DISPLAY ........................................................................... 175
8.9.4 WIDE SCREEN.......................................................................................................... 176
8.9.5 TIME ........................................................................................................................... 176
8.10 RADAR ECHO COLOR ...................................................................................................... 177
8.11 ERROR ALARM MASK ...................................................................................................... 178
8.11.1 SCANNER ............................................................................................................... 179
8.11.2 DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................................................................ 179
8.11.3 CONNECTION DEVICE .......................................................................................... 180
8.11.4 RX DATA .................................................................................................................. 180
8.12 NETWORK .......................................................................................................................... 181
8.12.1 NETWORK FUNCTION ............................................................................................. 182
8.12.2
IP ADDRESS ........................................................................................................... 182
8.12.3
RADAR ECHO TRANSMISSION SETTING ........................................................... 182
8.13 NMEA2000 .......................................................................................................................... 184
8.13.1 NMEA2000 OUT ...................................................................................................... 185
8.13.2 NMEA2000 PGN ...................................................................................................... 185
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK ........................................................ 186
9.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................. 186
9.2 MAINTENANCE OF EACH UNIT ......................................................................................... 187
9.2.1 SCANNER UNIT NKE-2043, 2063A/AHS, 2103-4/4HS/6/6HS ................................ 187
9.2.2 DISPLAY NCD-2364 .................................................................................................. 189
9.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK .................................................................................................... 190
9.3.1 TEST-SYSTEM INFORMATION ............................................................................... 191
9.3.2 SYSTEM INFORMATION.......................................................................................... 191
9.3.3 SYSTEM TIME ........................................................................................................... 191
9.3.4 SCANNER INFORMATION ....................................................................................... 192
9.3.5 HARDWARE INFORMATION ................................................................................... 192
9.3.6 ERROR LOG ............................................................................................................. 192
9.3.7 LINE MONITOR ......................................................................................................... 192
9.3.8 SELF TEST ................................................................................................................ 193
9.3.9 SOFTWARE UPDATE ............................................................................................... 195
9.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS ................................................................................. 196
9.4.1 PARTS REQUIRED FOR PERIODIC REPLACEMENT .......................................... 197
9.5 FAULT FINDING ................................................................................................................... 198
9.5.1 ALARMS AND OTHER DISPLAY LISTS .................................................................. 198
9.6 TROUBLE SHOOTING ........................................................................................................ 203
9.6.1 SPECIAL PARTS ....................................................................................................... 203
9.6.2 CIRCUIT BLOCK TO BE REPAIRED ....................................................................... 204
Chapter 10 AFTER-SALE SERVICE ................................................................ 206
10.1 KEEPING PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE PARTS .............................................................. 206
10.2 WHEN YOU REQUEST FOR REPAIR .............................................................................. 206
10.3 RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE ................................................................................... 206 xxxix
CONTENTS
10.4 RADAR FAILURE CHECK LIST ........................................................................................ 207
Chapter 11 DISPOSAL ..................................................................................... 208
11.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT .................................................................................................. 208
11.2 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON................................................................................ 208
11.3 CHINA ROHS ..................................................................................................................... 208
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................... 209
12.1 SCANNER DIMENSION .................................................................................................... 210
12.1.1 NKE-2043 ................................................................................................................. 210
12.1.2 NKE-2063A/AHS...................................................................................................... 211
12.1.3 NKE-2103-4/4HS ..................................................................................................... 212
12.1.4 NKE-2103-6/6HS ..................................................................................................... 213
12.2 DISPLAY DIMENSION ....................................................................................................... 214
12.2.1 NCD-2364 ................................................................................................................ 214
12.3 EQUIPMENT OUTLINE ...................................................................................................... 215
12.3.1 CONFIGULATION ................................................................................................... 215
12.3.2 FEATURE ................................................................................................................ 215
12.3.3 RADAR MODEL ...................................................................................................... 215
12.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... 216
12.5 SCANNER .......................................................................................................................... 218
12.5.1 SCANNER (NKE-2043) SPECIFICATION .............................................................. 218
12.5.2 SCANNER (NKE-2063A/AHS) SPECIFICATION ................................................... 219
12.5.3 SCANNER (NKE-2103-4/6/4HS/6HS) SPECIFICATION ....................................... 220
12.6 DISPLAY ............................................................................................................................. 221
12.6.1 INTEGRATED DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-2364) ........................................................... 221
12.6.2 OPERATIONAL PART ............................................................................................ 223
12.6.3 AIS FUNCTION (STANDARD BUILT IN) ................................................................ 224
12.6.4 TT FUNCTION (STANDARD BUILT IN) ................................................................. 224
12.7 INPUT/ OUTPUT SIGNAL .................................................................................................. 225
12.7.1 INPUT ENABLE SIGNAL ........................................................................................ 225
12.7.2 OUTPUT POSSIBLE SIGNAL ................................................................................. 227
12.7.3 STANDARD CONFIGURATION ............................................................................. 227
12.7.4 OPTION CABLE ...................................................................................................... 227
APPENDIX ................................................................................................................ 1
NKE-2043 SCANNER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ........................................................ 1
NKE-2063A SCANNER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM...................................................... 2
NKE-2063AHS SCANNER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................ 3
NKE-2103-4/4HS/6/6HS SCANNER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................. 4
NCD-2364 DISPLAY UNIT INTER CONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................ 5
JMA-3400 PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM ................................................................ 6
JMA-3404 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ........................................................................... 7
JMA-3406/HS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ..................................................................... 8
JMA-3411-4/4HS/6/6HS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ..................................................... 9 xl
CONTENTS
MENU FUNCTION LIST .......................................................................................................... 12
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ....................................................................................... 29 xli
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY
This section describes the main terms used for this equipment and general related maritime terms.
Activated target
A
A target representing the automatic or manual activation of a sleeping target for the display of additional information.
AIS Automatic Identification System
A system which enables ships and shore stations to obtain identifying and navigation information about other ships at sea, using an automated transponder.
Anti-clutter rain Rain/snow clutter suppression.
Anti-clutter sea Sea clutter suppression.
AZ Acquisition/Activation zone
A zone set up by the operator in which the system should automatically acquire radar targets and activate reported AIS targets when entering the zone.
AZI Azimuth stabilization mode
B
BCR/BCT
Beacon
Bft.
Bow Crossing Range and Bow Crossing Time
In this manual it means radio station that is already known accurate position.
DGPS use to calculate for higher accuracy than GPS.
Beaufort scale
0: Calm, 1: Light air, 2: Light breeze, 3: Gentle breeze, 4: Moderate breeze,
5: Fresh breeze, 6: Strong breeze, 7: High wind, 8: fresh gale,
9: Strong gale, 10: Storm, 11: Violent storm, 12: Hurricane
C-UP
C
Course up
Own ship
’s course is pointed to the top center of the radar display.
CCRP The Consistent Common Reference Point
A location on own ship, to which all horizontal measurements such as target range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, CPA or TCPA are referenced, typically the conning position of the bridge.
Clutter Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, from sea surface, rain or snow.
COG Course Over Ground
The direction of the ship's movement relative to the earth, measured on board the ship, expressed in angular units from true north
Compass A device indicates the direction.
CORREL Correlation
CPA/TCPA The distance to the Closest Point of Approach and Time to the Closest Point of
Approach. Limits are set by the operator and are related to own ship.
CTW Course Through Water
The direction of the ship's movement through the water
D
Differential Global Positioning System DGPS
DRIFT The current velocity for manual correction or the current speed on the horizontal axis of the
2-axis log is displayed.
EBL
ENH
E
Electronic Bearing Line
An electronic bearing line originated from own shi p’s position.
Enhance xlii
GLOSSARY
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
F
fm Fathom 1fm=1.8288m
FTC Fast Time Constant
Function of FTC reduces the effect of long duration returns that come from rain or snow.
G
GPS Global Positioning System
GPS is a space-based satellite navigation system that provides location and time information in all weather conditions.
Ground stabilization A display mode in which speed and course information are referred to the ground, using ground track input data.
Gyrocompass A gyrocompass is non-magnetic compass which is based on a fast spinning disc and rotation of the Earth to automatically find north and south direction.
HDG
H
Heading
The horizontal direction that the bow of a ship is pointing at any instant, expressed in angular units from a reference direction.
HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision
The accuracy of the position. If the value is small, the accuracy of position is high.
HL
H-UP
Heading line
A graphic line on a radar presentation drawn from the consistent common reference point to the bearing scale to indicate the heading of the ship
Head up
Own shi p’s heading line is always pointed to the top center of the radar display.
I
IR Radar Interference Rejecter
LL
L
Latitude/ Longitude coordinate system
Log A device measures the speed through the water.
LORAN Long Range Navigation
A system in which position is determined from the intervals between signal pulses received from widely spaced radio transmitters.
Lost AIS target A target symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS target before the reception of its data was lost, or its last dead-reckoned position.
Lost tracked target
LP
One for which target information is no longer available due to poor, lost or obscured signals.
Long Pulse
M
MMSI
MOB
MP
Maritime Mobile Service Identity
Man Over Board
Medium Pulse
N
Electronic navigational chart supplier headquartered in Italy. Navionics new pec
NM
Electronic Reference Charts issued by Japan Hydrographic Association.
1NM=1852m
NMEA National Marine Electronics Association xliii
GLOSSARY
NSK
N-UP
North Stabilization Kit
North up
The north is always pointed to the top center of the radar display.
O
Own track Display function of own ship
’s track
Open Array Antenna An antenna consisting of arrayed antenna elements, covered with a radome, and rotating itself.
P
PI Parallel Index line
Past positions Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked or AIS target and own ship.
POSN Position
PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency
The number of radar pulses transmitted each second.
PROC Process
Radar signal processing function
Radar
R
Acronym for RAdio Detection And Ranging
Radar beacon A navigation aid which responds to the radar transmission by generating a radar signal to identify its position and identity
Radar cross-section Radar cross-section of a target determines the power density returned to the radar for a particular power density incident on the target
Range Rings A set of concentric circles labeled by distance from CCRP.
Reference target A symbol indicating that the associated tracked stationary target is used as a speed reference for the ground stabilization
Relative course
Relative speed
Relative vector
RM
The direction of motion of a target relative to own ship motion
The speed of a target relative to own ship ’s speed data
A predicted movement of a target relative to own ship
’s motion
Relative Motion
A display on which the position of own ship remains fixed, and all targets move relative to own ship.
RM(R) Relative Motion. Relative Trails.
RM(T) Relative Motion. True Trails.
ROT Rate of Turn
Change of heading per time unit.
Route A set of waypoints.
RR Range Rings
SART
S
Search And Rescue Transponder
Radar transponder capable of operating in the 9GHz band
SBAS Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Generic technique for correcting the error of the GPS using the geostationary satellite
This is used for the positioning accuracy of GPS higher.
Sea stabilization A display mode in which speed and course information are referred to the sea. xliv
Sea state
SET
Sleeping AIS target sm
SOG
SP
STAB
STC
STW
TCPA
Test target
TM
Trails
True course
True speed
True vector
TT
TTG
TXRX
UTC
USB
VRM
GLOSSARY
Status of the sea condition due to the weather environment, expressed as a sea state 0 for flat conditions with minimal wind, to sea state 8 for very rough sea conditions.
The current direction for manual correction or the current speed on the horizontal axis of the
2-axis log is displayed.
A target indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location.
Statute mile 1sm=1609.344m
Speed Over the Ground
The speed of the ship relative to the earth, measured on board of the ship.
Short Pulse
Stabilization
Sensitivity Time Control
Function of STC reduces the impact of returns from sea state of relatively near from own ship.
Speed Through Water
The speed of the ship relative to the water surface.
T
Time to Closest Point of Approach to own ship
Radar target of known characteristics used for test requirement
True Motion
A display across which own ship moves with its own true motion.
Display Radar Trails (Other Ships' Trails)
The direction of motion relative to ground or to sea, of a target expressed as an angular displacement from north
The speed of a target relative to ground, or to sea
A vector representing the predicted true motion of a target, showing course and speed with reference to the ground or sea
Target Tracking
A computer process of observing the sequential changes in the position of a radar target in order to establish its motion. Such a target is a Tracked Target.
Time To Go
Time to next waypoint.
Transceiver Unit
U
Universal Time Coordinated
The international standard of time, kept by atomic clocks around the world.
Universal Serial Bus
USB was designed to standardize the connection of computer peripherals.
V
Variable Range Marker
An adjustable range ring used to measure the distance to a target.
W
A geographical location on a route indicating an event Waypoint xlv
GLOSSARY xlvi
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.1 OVERVIEW
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
The proper installation of the radar equipment is critical in ensuing its effective and reliable performance as well as facilitating maintenance and repair. Carefully install the radar equipment by following the procedures below.
⚫ Considering the weight of the scanner unit and install it in a high place as possible.
⚫ It is preferable to install the display unit in the wheel house to facilitate observations.
⚫ Available cable lengths and types for installing the radar JMA-3400 are as shown in the table below. Request an appropriate cable from JRC beforehand.
A cable longer than the sufficient length may degrade radar performance, so give it careful consideration when planning the installation.
All installation cable is option.
Installation Cable
H-CFQ-6912-5 5m (8 core)
(Option)
H-CFQ-6912-10 10m (8 core)
CFQ-6912-15 15m (8 core)
H-CFQ-6912-20 20m (8 core)
H-CFQ6012-30 30m (8 core)
Installation cable (option)
Power Supply Cable
Type Name: CFQ-7758
Length: 3m
Standard Supply
EXTERNAL SIGNAL INPUT
POWER INPUT 10.8V to 31.2V
Connect the arrows in the diagram.
(For inputting external signal, optional NMEA cable is required.
Refer to chapter 1.2.6.)
1
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.2 INSTALLATION OF THE DISPLAY UNIT
1.2.1 SELECTING THE INSTALLATION POSITION
Select the display unit installation position by taking into consideration of the followings.
■ Install the display unit so that the user can easily conduct observations.
■ To reduce affect on the magnetic compass, install the display unit more than 1 meter away from
the compass.
■ Take precautions to prevent water from splashing through the window or door of the bridge onto the display unit.
■ Install the display unit by considering convenience of maintenance.
■ Install the display unit so that when the user is looking ahead, the lookout view is not obscured.
■ Install the unit away from direct sunlight and heat source.
1.2.2 SELECTION OF DISPLAY MOUNTING
Display is designed to various mounting way for users circumstance.
Mounting way.
⚫ Desktop Installation
⚫ Flush Mounting
Note: JMA-3400 series are not supported to ceiling Installation.
2
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.2.3 DIMENSIONAL DRAWING OF DISPLAY MOUNTING
3
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
22
1 6 .1
4
97.1
90
1 13
2
200
BA
CK
S
PA
CE
OU T LINE
D I MENS I ONS
OVER TO
3
6
6
30
30 1 20
1 20 400
400 1 000
M DE
L
NAME PLATE
PERt--1 1 SS l BLE
D I S~~5 l ~AL
DEVIA T I CNS
±0 .
5
+ 1
±
1.5
±
2 .
5
±4
G
P
S
NMEA0
1
83
300 .
.
NMEA/ALARM
PER'v 1 1 SS l BL E
'tJ ~-~~~ ~ mAL
EV I AT I CNS
t
0 .
5
±1
±2
FU
POWER
4
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.2.4 EXAMPLES OF DISPLAY MOUNTING
■
DESK TOP INSTALLATION
Mounting Bracket
5
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
◼ DESKTOP MOUNTING TEMPLATE
(
U
ni
t:mm
)
(90)
1'--
LD
CJ
(Y)
CJ
N v
(\ i i i i i
!
! i i i i i i i i i i i i i
! i i
!
3 0 30
··-··-···-··-··--,...
·· - ·· -
··-----JC
~-"--·
-~lli
B
ra
cke
t v--
!
!
! i i i
-~ll-
!
CJ
N i i i
~ ~-~ --------+
"-7"------~··=·~·==·~ ~
7 -Pr
epared
h
ole
f
o
r t
a
ppi
n
g
screw
(Size
6x25(U)
Note: Please note the paper size.
6
◼ FLUSH MOUNTING
Remove base, and take out cover of front panel.
Please slide out, when removing of the front cap.
Fix with the front 4 corner screws to the wall.
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
7
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
◼ FLUSH MOUNTING TEMPLATE
Note: Please note the paper size.
8
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.2.5 POWER CABLE INSTALLATION
This equipment includes a 3m power cable for power supply to the display unit.
Cable assembly name: CFQ-7758
The cable core wire color is red/white (+), black/green (-) and shield mesh (frame ground).
Wire : AWG12
Red/White: +12/24V
Black/Green: 0V
Shield: FG (frame ground)
Note: Use a rectifier if necessary. CFQ-7758
When you connect with the ship power supply without using the optional rectifier, you need measure the voltage between the ground and the positive
/ negative side of the ship power supply.
When the ship power supply is more than 38V, please take through measures such as attaching a rectifier.
If you connect to the ship power supply directly without taking any measures, there is a risk of system failure or accident occur.
■ Power Cable Installation
Connect the power cable (CFQ-7758) to the power input connector of display unit.
At that time, please turn to the right the tip locking mechanism to lock the position of the connector.
9
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.2.6 EXTERNAL NAVIGATIONAL SIGNAL CONNECTION
(GPS, AIS, GYRO, LOG, etc.) Connecting cable is option
Option NMEA cable: “CFQ-9002 (GPS)”, “CFQ-5374 (NMEA0183)”
In case of using option NMEA cable, waterproofing (IPX5) is guaranteed. Thus using another NMEA cable, waterproofing (IPX5) is not guaranteed.
・ Using JRC GPS receiver, please connect NMEA4 (GPS port).
・ AIS connects all NMEA port available.
Navigation system interfaces, such as GPS
Telecommunications standard NMEA0183 / IEC61162-1/2 conformity
Communications protocol: 4800 bps, start 1bit, data 8bit, stop 1bit, and no parity
Input sentence NMEA0183: V1.5: GGA/ GLL/ RMC
V2.0: GGA/ GLL/ RMC/ ZDA
V2.3: GGA/ GLL/ RMC/ GNS/ ZDA
(Talker= "G P" etc.)
Information ship position and the time; GGA/ GNS/ GLL/ RMC
Day ZDA
Time of equipment: ZDA/ GGA/ GNS/ GLL/ RMC
Reference :
NMEA0183 content outline of standard input / output sentence
$xxACK
$xxBWC
$xxCUR
$xxGGA
$xxGLL
$xxGNS
$xxMTW
$xxMWD
$xxMWV
$xxRMA
$xxRMB
$xxRMC
$xxROT
$xxRSA
$xxTHS
$xxVBW
$xxVDM
$xxVDO
$xxVTG
$xxZDA
Acknowledgement alarm
Bearing and Distance to Waypoint
Water current layer
Global Positioning System Fix Data
Geographic Position - Latitude/Longitude
GNSS fix data
Water temperature
Wind direction and speed
Wind speed and angle
Recommended Minimum Specific LORAN-C data
Recommended Minimum Navigation Information
Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data
Rate Of Turn
Rudder Sensor Angle
True Heading and Status
Dual ground/water speed
AIS VHF Data-link Message
AIS VHF Data-link Own-vessel report
Course Over Ground and Ground Speed
Time and Date
10
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
JMA-3400 series is compatible with NMEA2000.
To use NMEA2000, an optional NMEA2000 cable is required.
The model name of the NMEA2000 option cable is “CFQ-7765.”
For information about NMEA2000 PGN that can be used for input/output, see "12.7 INPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNAL."
11
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.3 INSTALLATION OF THE SCANNER UNIT
1.3.1 SELECTING THE INSTALLATION POSITION
◼ PHYSICAL SELECTION CRITERIA
⚫ Install the scanner at the center of the mast on the keel line.
⚫ If the scanner cannot be installed at the above position for some reason, the amount of deviation must be minimized. And, reinforce the mount base and the platform and take precautions to protect the scanner from vibration and impact at the installation position.
⚫ To avoid the radiating section coming in contact with other installed objects while it is rotating, ensure that there is at least 200 millimeters from the swing circle (turning radius) to other installed objects (Fig. 1-3-1-1). The swing circle of the JMA-3400 radar's scanner is as shown in
Table 1-3-1-2.
⚫ Please note that not affected by the smoke from the chimney.
⚫ Avoid having a rope or signal flag from winding around the radiating section thereby preventing it from rotating.
⚫ Please secure maintenance spaces (a platform, a safety link, a handrail, a step, etc.).
Set up a scaffolding for maintenance if the minimum height shown above is 1 m or more.
Fig. 1-3-1-1
Table1-3-1-2
Scanner model (length)
NKE-2043
NKE-2063A/AHS (3.9 feet)
NKE-2103-4/4HS (4 feet)
NKE-2103-6/6HS (6 feet)
Swing circle
620 mm (radome)
1,220 mm
1,320 mm
1,910 mm
12
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
◼ ELECTRICAL SELECTION CRITERIA
⚫ The installation height of the scanner relates to the maximum detection distance.
The higher, the better. However, if it is too high, radio wave energy greatly attenuates above the scanner's vertical beam width (the point -3 dB from the peak of the main-lobe).
As a result, it is difficult to detect a close-in target. Sea clutter also increases.
Determine the installation height by taking into consideration the weight, maximum length of the cable, and maintenance after installation. If the installation height of the scanner is low, it is difficult to detect a long distance target. The ship's mast, derrick, and chimney interfere with radiating beam causing the range that cannot be viewed on the radar display to increase.
1.3.2 LOWEST SCANNER INSTALLATION HEIGHT
Generally, the lowest scanner installation position is supposed to be on the A-B line shown in Fig. 1-3-2.
In the case of the JMA-3400 series radar, 2 θ equals 10°.
Specifically, the scanner position is normally elevated so that the chimney and the shrine-gate type mast do not interfere with radiating beam.
JMA-3400 : θ= 10 ° (2θ= 20 °)
Fig. 1-3-2
13
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.3.3 MOUNTING RACK AND MAST FOR THE SCANNER
If it is considered that sufficient installation height cannot be provided when the scanner is installed directly on the roof of the wheelhouse, use a mounting rack or radar mast (Fig. 1-3-3).
Normally, when the scanner installation height is less than 2 meters from the roof of the wheelhouse, provide a mounting rack assembled at an angle frame to install the scanner. When the scanner installation height is 2 m or higher from the roof of the wheelhouse, provide a cylindrical radar mast to install the scanner.
Consider the convenience of the service staff who take care of installation, maintenance, adjustment and repair of the scanner by providing adequate footholds to the mounting rack and the radar mast.
Installation
Installation
Fig. 1-3-3
1.3.4 SCANNER AND THE SURROUNDING STRUCTURAL
OBJECTS
When installing the scanner, select a location where there are the fewest structural objects in the surrounding area so that false images which interfere with target detection will not be generated by signal reflection from other scanners, deck structures, and cargo
Only as a guide, note that structural objects should not exist within the range of the vertical beam width
(Fig. 1-3-4).
NKE-2043 Vertical beam width: Approx.25° (+/-12.5° when the height of the radiating section is 0°)
NKE-2063A/AHS Vertical beam width: Approx.30° (+/-15.0° when the height of the radiating section is 0°)
NKE-2103-4/4HS Vertical beam width: Approx.20° (+/-10.0° when the height of the radiating section is 0°)
NKE-2103-6/6HS Vertical beam width: Approx.20° (+/-10.0° when the height of the radiating section is 0°)
Fig. 1-3-4
Fig. 1-3-4
14
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
When installing two scanners, provide a height difference so that those two scanners do not enter each other's vertical beam width range.
To avoid interference with other equipment and to prevent radio noise from generating, do not place the VHF antenna, GPS antenna, and INMARSAT's dome within the range of the vertical beam width. Keep a record of installation height data. The data is necessary for the initial setting of the display unit.
Magnetron which has strong magnetic force is included in the scanner. Install the scanner at least 3 meters away from nautical instruments including magnetic compasses and chronometers.
1.3.5 ENSURING VIEW ANGLE
Minimize the blind sector, and ensure the adequate view angle so that the blind sector does not exist in the range 22.5° from side to rear (Fig. 1-3-5).
Specifically, ensure a sufficient view field in the straight front (relative bearing 0°). direction
Make no blind sector
Fig. 1-3-5
Reference:
⚫ If there is a concern that structural objects existing within the vertical beam width may generate false images, equip the structural objects with a radio wave absorber.
(There are two types of absorbers: broadband type having no specific resonant frequency and narrowband type which can absorb a band with a specific frequency. Use those where applicable.)
Furthermore, it is effective to install a metal reflector, which reflects radio waves upwardly, between the scanner and a structural object so that the radar's radio wave will not directly come in contact with the structural object
⚫ Because most radio wave absorbers have poor durability, some must be replaced every year.
When installing a reflector, the area to the rear of the reflector becomes a blind sector.
Therefore, minimize the size of the reflector.
⚫ The above procedures for selecting an scanner installation position are described based
on the radar's scanner. Comprehensively select the scanner position by considering other
scanners' installation procedure manual, hull's structure, strength of the selected position,
and vibration.
15
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
■
Confirmation during test run
If the scanner vibrates a lot during test run, try to reduce or prevent vibration by reinforcing the scanner mount base or using wire stays attached to the radar mast.
◼ Others
The design of the mounting platform for the scanner should take into account the vibration requirements defined by IEC 60945.
Vibration
2 to 13.2 Hz
Frequency
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz
Amplitude +/-1 mm +/-10 %
Acceleration 7m/s 2 constant
⚫ All installations should facilitate protection of equipment, including cabling, from damage.
⚫ The cables should be kept as short as possible to minimize attenuation of the signal.
⚫ Crossing of cables should be done at right angles(90°) to minimize magnetic field coupling.
⚫ Install the radar cable as far as from the cables of other radio equipment in order to prevent other radio equipment from interfering with the radar operations. Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of other radio equipment.
⚫ Cable should not be exposed sharp bends.
⚫ Ensure that the equipment is grounded.
◼ Maintain a flat level surface on which to install the scanner
⚫ Use sufficiently thick steel material and reinforcement material for the scanner's installation surface (mount base) to reduce vibration and impact. Keep the mount base flat and smooth.
⚫ If there is a partial gap between the mount base and the scanner chassis's legs, work on the installation surface so that it becomes flat and smooth, or make adjustments by inserting metal shims.
If a gap exists and the scanner is tightly clamped, the chassis will distort and become damaged by vibration.
◼ Avoid using vibration-proof rubber and resin
⚫ Do not insert an elastic body, such as vibration-proof rubber or resin, between the mount base and the scanner chassis legs. If rubber or resin is inserted, the amplitude of vibration increases, resulting in the possibility of damage to the scanner.
Furthermore, if installation bolts become loose due to deterioration of rubber or resin, the scanner may be damaged or fall from its mount
16
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.3.6 CONFIRM MOUNTING BASE BEFORE INSTALL
NKE-2043 2FT SCANNER
CABLE GLAND
Fig 1-3-6-1
Fig 1-3-6-2
17
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
NKE-2063A/AHS 3.9FT SCANNER
(Opens the upper part of the cabinet when equipped or during maintenance.)
Fig 1-3-6-3
Fig 1-3-6-4
CABLE GLAND
18
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
NKE-2103-4/4HS 4FT SCANNER
(Opens the upper part of the cabinet when equipped or during maintenance.)
Fig 1-3-6-5
CABLE GLAND
SAFETY SWITCH
Fig 1-3-6-6
19
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
NKE-2103-6/6HS 6FT SCANNER
(Opens the upper part of the cabinet when equipped or during maintenance.)
Fig 1-3-6-7
Fig 1-3-6-8
CABLE GLAND
SAFETY SWITCH
20
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
◼ Installation and clamping method
■
Installation direction
Installation should be done so that the cable gland is oriented toward the stern.
■
Bolts, nuts and tightening torque to be used
Use stainless steel bolts for the scanner and uniformly tighten all of the bolts (Table 1-3-6-1).
Table 1-3-6-1 Length of scanner mounting bolts and tightening torque
Thickness of Mount Base (mm) Bolt Torque (N ▪ m)
3-15 mm (Recommend) M8X30SUS (attachment) 20 N ▪ m
◼ Use of washer and corrosion-resistant measures
At the location where a bolt's head comes in contact with the scanner chassis' legs and the mount base, insert a plain washer and spring washer which fit the bolt; and then securely tighten the bolts. To prevent corrosion due to the contacts between different metals, such as the scanner chassis' legs, installation surface, bolts etc., cover the bolt's head with sealant .
◼ Grounding and corrosion-resistant measures
Do not install the scanner in place where puddles are often formed.
21
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.4 CONNECTING THE INSTALLATION CABLE
◼ Installation cable
Fig 1-4-1
22
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.4.1 NKE-2043 SCANNER (2 FEET)
Set the cable inlet side to stern.
(Any direction is possible to install and possible to initial setup, but it is better selection to select the cable length must be minimize along the mast.)
Ship heading bow
Fig. 1-4-1-1
◼ Open radome
Loosen the screws by using box spanner tool, then you can lift up the radome.
RECEIVER
(2FT)
Loosen the screws
(6 points)
CABLE INLET stern
HORN ANNTENNA
Fig. 1-4-1-2
23
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
•
NK E
-
2043
Clamp :he c ab l e at shie l dnet n.ilber-bush i ng
; :jJ...1·:;y~ ' , , o l ampinro l aw -~
")j. seal n ut
24
Fig. 1-4-1-3
C l amp ca b le at cop p er t ape ll7 1f.Jt~~ \"(,i,.Q!Ji\ff""C
?7';./:fTQ o
P 4 i 5 a r e no t ro n n r.c:t r.
rl , f i x t hem t o th e i n sta ll a t i o n ca b le w i lh ca b le tie .
Rotate the antenna and confirm the
cable doesn
' t
knock ·
nst. tii;I;Ji2$lfti:7~-'"TT~@IE~1t"C
'T "1 Jt.-tJ~~t.:J?tJL
'.:cHtmoK-l.:
o
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
When mounting the scanner unit, please check the maximum length of the holding bolts. If the bolts are too long, it gives severe damage to inside of the scanner. When mounting the scanner unit, please use the attached bolts.
The mounting base thickness must not exceed 15mm (0.6inch).
25
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
Fig. 1-4-1-4
Clamp the cable Connect cable mesh wire as Ground.
◼ Close radome
Attach the radome. Set to fit the triangle mark of the upper and lower radome.
In the following order, on the diagonal, tighten gradually in order to press uniformly packing.
Like this
4
6
2
1
5
3
Fig. 1-4-1-5
26
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.4.2 NKE-2063A SCANNER (3.9 FEET)
•
NKE-2063
2. Pu t the cable into the sca n ner u nit from cable g l and.
.. .A
"t
.Q.
Put the cable into seal-nut , clamping-c l aw , and rubber-bush.
Sectional view lfTjljjjgl cable sheath
Cl8 G rj ~=:~-E_7:
1/t-~llatl
Clamp tne cable at shieldnet
~ J(..j-:';f.·yf-$~??~1'-t ~
C l amp the cable .
(Sectional view)
7-1;1.-~??~1'-t~
( lfJT iDi
[gJ ) rubber-bushing
::~· k 1 ·y~
.:t clamping-claw seal-nut
27
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
28
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1.4.3 NKE-2063AHS SCANNER (3.9 FEET)
• NKE-2063
1. Equip the scanner unit with brass-washers: appended. brass-washer
JdR~FJ·;;~-\7
2. Put the cable into the scanner unit from cable gland .
Sectional view
IITim~
Clamp tne cable at shieldnet
.YJL-1-=*·;;~$~?7/::fT
{>
Clamp the cable.
(Sectional view)
/
7-"1/L.-~?7/:f"t.Q
(If iii lSI) rubber bushing
/ -=I k ""j
'')~
:J.. clamping-claw
':J j. seal nut
Put the cable into seal-nut, clamping-claw , and rubber-bush.
29
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
30
1.4.4 NKE-2103-4/6 SCANNER (4 FEET/6 FEET)
• NKE-210
3
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
1 . Put th e cable into c a b l e g l a nd w a s h e rs a n d g ask et.
T e a r the tape .
'T-1 J L-~'J ·~ ~-v . ti A'T· ~I-,
?"7/l-!'
l
:iML
,
7:f ~lt ] fJ ( t tear aw a y c a b le s h e a th iUI~ifjtJ { t h e r
')·~~""' g a s k e t tiA'T · ~t-sh ield n et
~ Jv!-!';t· ~1-cab le g l a nd
?"7/
l-!' c able s heath
t&:fl
2 . U n k n it s h i e l d n e t and wrap it a r ound a wa s h e r .
~-Jvt:;t· ~1--~l;f l:" ~ , 'J·~~ -vr :~~i -t lt.Q
o
3 . Equip the scanner un it with brass-washers : appended . brass-washe r s
:JiiUit
r;
·;;
~
4 . Cut the shield ribbo n and the vi n y l cove r in g from current pos i t i on to 50mm lo wer part and then put the copper tape again. ft7f<1)itl.
M IJ'i;50mm~ Jv!-!
1 J if-/ C:t::: .=.Jv:fJ1 \ ~"JL
''"Ct}JITL,
~7 1~116~) i[L -c <t=~L ' o t o con n ector
::J;t-?~~ to connector
::J;t-?~~ copper tape
~ 7 :t to connector
::J;t-?~~ copper tape
~7 :f s hield r i bbo n
~ -J L-1'!1Ji'f-/ copper tape
~7 :f shieldribbon
~ -Jv i'!IJi'f-:t vi n yl covering t:
.=.)i.-1,11 \ vinyl covering t:::.=.
JL-:t.JJ\ v i ny l cove ri ng t:::.=.
J i.-:;IJJ\ -
31
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
5. Clamp the cable , connect 5 term i na ls and connecter.
7-"1
Jv~~~~?7~:tL, ~T-c::J*?1Z~ti~-t ~.
Clamp cab l e at copper tape.
-7-1Jt.-O)fll-T-1iJ<~L'tiV;,~ i;PJT"(?7~1t ~ .
J2
6. Apply silicone sealant around the bolts and in to the cable i nlet. if-Jvf-(T)J!!Ul~c'T-"1Jv?'7~1-=~~~-Jv"t~ ,
32
7. Bol t the earth cable to mountbase and scanner.
Apply s i lic one sealan t around the bolts.
7-A.'T-"1
Jv~if-Jvt-~~Usft, **t:SSll~~i:"t~-Jvt ~::co
-------r~.....---____._,_--bolt ( M6 X 12)
/ f.Jvt-
/ earth cable
7-'J...-7-1J~ earth bolt
7-'J...;f{JL-t-
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
If the basic adjustment is made by the serviceman beforehand, please run it as it is.
(In the case of no adjustment is done by the serviceman beforehand, you had better grasped the operation of this radar through referring to Chapter 5, then please perform the initial settings that are listed in Chapter 7.)
2.1 PANEL AND SCREEN DISPLAY LAYOUT
Own Ship Movement
Range
Adjustment bar
Pulse Width
Function Mode
MOB
Anchor Watch
Scanner state
Heading Line
Range Rings
Cursor
Anchor Watch
MOB
System Running
Animation
IR
Target Enhance
Process
Sensitivity
Sea Clutter
Suppression
Rain/Snow Clutter
Suppression
Bearing Mode Heading Speed
Numerical Information
治
Numerical Info.
Alarm
Guard Zone1
Wind
Speed/Direction
Guard Zone2
Guard Zone1
Guard Zone2
Screen Capture
Trail Length
Own Track Length
Vector Length
33
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
2.2 OPERATION UNIT
①
②
⑪
⑫
⑬
⑭
⑮
⑯
34
④
③
⑤
⑥
⑦
⑧
⑨
⑩
Speaker
⑰
⑱
⑤
⑥
⑦
No.
①
Name
MENU button
②
③
④
⑧
⑨
⑩
CLR button
Cross key
ENT button
RANGE button
USER1 button
USER2 button
VRM button
EBL button
MULTI control
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
Description
Press : Opens/closes the menu.
Long press : Opens the code input screen (the Adjust Menu).
Press : Cancels menu operations.
Returns to upper menu.
Long press:
Press :
Long press:
Press:
Long press:
Stops the alarm sound.
Cancels menu operations.
Selects menu items. Moves the cursor.
Accelerates cursor movement.
Enters the selected menu item.
Registers menu shortcut to the USER1 button and USER2 button.
Press: Switches the range.
Press/Long press
Press/Long press
:
:
The menu registered in the “User” menu of the in Main Menu opens.
The menu registered in the “User” menu of the in Main Menu opens.
Press : Displays VRM1, and change to VRM operation mode.
Press twice: Displays VRM2, and change to VRM operation mode.
Long press : Turns off the VRM1 or 2 which is selected by short-pressing the VRM button.
Press : Displays EBL1, and change to EBL operation mode.
Press twice: Displays EBL2, and change to EBL operation mode.
Long press : Turns off the EBL1 or 2 which is selected by short-pressing the EBL button.
Press:
Long press:
Turn right:
When no menu is displayed, the MULTI control menu is displayed.
While any menu is displayed, determine the item selection on the menu.
Turns off the several functions, etc.
Moves the cursor to the right when any menu is not displayed.
Moves clockwise EBL.
Increases VRM ring.
Moves clockwise the parallel cursor direction.
Increases the numerical value.
35
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
No. Name
⑩
⑪
⑫
⑬
⑭
⑮
⑯
MULTI control
GAIN control
SEA control
RAIN control
FUNC button
BRILL control
STBY button
Description
Turn left: Moves the cursor to the left when any menu is not displayed.
Moves counterclockwise EBL.
Decreases VRM ring.
Moves counterclockwise the parallel cursor direction.
Decreases the numerical value.
Turn right while pressing: Moves the cursor up when any menu is not displayed.
Increases the width of parallel cursor.
Turn left while pressing: Moves the cursor down when any menu is not displayed.
Press:
Decreases the width of parallel cursor.
Switches the sensitivity between manual and
Turn: automatic modes.
Adjusts receiving sensitivity.
Press:
Turn:
Press:
Turn:
Switches the sea clutter suppression function between manual and automatic modes.
Removes sea clutter.
Switches the rain/snow clutter suppression function between manual and automatic modes.
Removes rain/snow clutter.
Press: Switches function mode.
[OFF -> Standard -> Coast -> Deepsea -> Fishnet -> Bird -> User]
Long press: Turns off function mode.
Press: Switches the brilliance mode. [Day->Dusk->Night]
Long press:
Turn:
Changes brilliance level to MAX (10).
Changes the display brilliance.
Press:
Long press:
Turns on this equipment (when it is turned off).
Turns to standby state (when the equipment is transmitting).
Turns off the equipment when pressed together with the TX/PRF key.
Long press for more than 20 seconds to forcibly terminate the display unit.
Caution: If you forcibly terminate it, it may not operate normally after restarting. Except for emergencies such as when the display unit stops responding, turn off the unit by press the STBY +
TX/PRF button.
36
⑰
⑱
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
TX/PRF button
Press: Starts transmitting (in standby state)
Tunes the repetition frequency (when transmitting).
Long press: Forced termination of preheat countdown during preheating.
Turns off the heading line. (after preheating finished).
USB/Chart Card File save, software update
37
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
2.3 POWER ON/OFF
38
A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar. In the case, the power should be turned on again.
When the display unit is turned off by the power drop, power supply to the scanner unit also stops.
Make sure that the supply voltage to the display unit is stable, the power should be turned on again.
Note:
⚫ Wait for about 2 seconds before turn on the power again.
⚫ Immediately after the radar is installed, at start of the system after it has not been used for a long time, or after the magnetron is replaced, preheat the equipment in the standby state for 20 to 30 minutes before setting it into the transmit state.
⚫ If the preheating time is short, the magnetron causes sparks, resulting in its unstable oscillation.
Start transmission on a short-pulse range and change the range to the longer pulse ranges in turn. If the transmission is unstable in the meantime, immediately place the system back into the standby state and maintain it in the standby state for 5 to 10 minutes before restarting the operation. Repeat these steps until the operation is stabilized.
◼ Power on
(90 seconds preheat time is required for cold start, because of the Magnetron heater.)
After 90 seconds, anytime transmitting is possible.
Press the STBY button
Opening screen
Preheating time display
(Preheating time : 90 seconds)
Reference:
The radar cannot start transmission if you press the TX/PRF icon while the preheating time is displayed.
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
◼ Power off
Press STBY + TX/PRF button
2.4 SCREEN LAYOUT
2.4.1 STANDBY SCREEN
◼
Standby screen
Standby screen is selectable from below 5 types.
Standby screens can be switched by STBY button.
② Graphical screen
① Normal screen
Vessel speed and course
⑤ Numerical screen
③ Graphical screen
Wind speed and direction
④ Graphical screen
Temperature and depth
39
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
40
Note:
・ Initial settings are required to display screens ② to ⑤ .
Refer to “8.9 SCREEN DISPLAY” for setting.
・ Even on the screens of ② , ③ , ④ , and ⑤ above, transmission can be performed by pressing the TX/PRF button.
Then press the STBY button, return to the standby screen that was displayed before the
TX/PRF button was pressed.
● Photo frame settings
Any image file can be set to the standby screen.
1. Put images in the USB “JMA-3400\IMAGE" folder beforehand.
2. Enter “77777” in the code input screen that appears by long pressing the MENU button.
3. Photo frame display ON/OFF can be set.
Set ON to display the photo frame.
Example
2.4.2 TRANSMISSION SCREEN
◼ Starting transmission
Press the TX/PRF button
Transmit
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
◼ Stopping transmission
Press the STBY button
Standby
2.5 MULTI CONTROL OPERATION
● Basic operation of the MULTI control menu
1. Press the MULTI control, the MULTI control menu will be displayed.
Press the MULTI control, the
MULTI control menu will be displayed.
No operation for about 30 seconds, the menu disappears automatically.
EBL1
EBL2
VRM1
VRM2
Parallel Cursor
MOB
Anchor Watch
Vector Length
Radar Trails
AIS
TT
OFF-CENTER
Mark
Line
Ownship Mark
Data Off
×
41
EBL1
EBL2
VRM1
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
VRM2
Parallel Cursor
2. Turn the MULTI control to move the menu focus.
MOB
moves the focus down
Anchor Watch
Vector Length
Radar Trails
Turning right: moves the focus down
Radar Trails
Turning left: moves the focus up
EBL1
EBL2
VRM1
VRM2
Parallel Cursor
MOB
Anchor Watch
Vector Length
Radar Trails
Radar Trails
AIS
Target Tracking
OFF-CENTER
Mark
~
Line
~
・
Ownship Mark
・
Data Off
・
×
Mark
Line
Ownship Mark
Data Off
×
Note:
When the focus is at the top of the MULTI control menu, there is no item that can be selected by turning the MULTI control counterclockwise. Similarly, there is no item that can be selected by turning the MULTI control clockwise when it is at the bottom.
42
Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
2.5.1 FUNCTION OVERVIEW OF MULTI CONTROL MENU
Menu Description
EBL1, 2
VRM1, 2
Electric Bearing Line.
Measure the target direction by using cursor line.
Variable Range Marker.
Measure the target distance by using circle line.
Parallel Cursor
MOB (Man Over board)
Anchor Watch
Vector Length
Radar Trails
AIS
TT
OFF-CENTER
Mark
Line
Ownship Mark
Data Off (On)
Displays 7 parallel lines.
For adjusting the direction of the parallel cursor by turning the MULTI control.
For adjusting the interval of the parallel lines by turning the MULTI control while pressing it.
When the crew fail into over the board by accident. Carry out MOB function immediately.
The radar memorizes the place latitude and longitude information, and continues displaying the MOB place on a screen.
When going to rescue, navigator can take course to the MOB point on screen.
Caution: GPS signal must be connected in this function.
The anchor monitoring circle is displayed and the anchor monitoring is performed.
Watch for dragging anchor.
An alarm will be issued when the ship comes out of the monitoring circle.
Set the vector length of own ship and the others.
Vectors are displayed as dotted lines.
Display Radar Trails (Other Ships' Trails). In the initial state, the “Time” trails are displayed in cyan and the “All” the trails are displayed in dark green.
When received the AIS signal, the data of MMSI of the vessel which has transmitted, latitude, longitude, a direction of movement, speed, rate of turn, etc. is displayed.
A function that automatically tracks the movement of targets, and calculates the course and speed of the targets.
The own ship's position can be moved from the display center to any position within 66% of the display radius. This function is convenient for observing a wide coverage in any direction.
Uses for putting a mark on the screen. It is also used when deleting unnecessary marks.
Uses for drawing a line on the screen. It is also used to delete unnecessary lines.
A mark is put to the position where the own ship is.
The information except Radar echo, radar trails, cursor, and some information can be hidden.
To display the hidden information again, press [Data On] in the MULTI control menu.
43
Chapter 3 ADJUST THE RADAR ECHO
Chapter 3 ADJUST THE RADAR ECHO
3.1 CHANGE RANGE
Pressing RANGE button + or - changes the observation range.
● Press the RANGE + button → Extend the range
● Press the RANGE - button → Reduce the range
Range
Range ring interval
Range can be set from 0.125NM to 72NM.
* The maximum range of JMA-3404 and
JMA-3406/HS is 48NM.
3.2 SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT (GAIN)
It is necessary to set an appropriate gain level in order to use the radar exactly.
Failure to do so, it is possible to obtain an accurate radar echo.
The sensitivity value is displayed at the lower part of the screen when the GAIN control is turned left or right.
Turning the control right increases the value, and turning it left decreases the value.
About the GAIN control : please refer to the number 11 in Chapter 2.2.
44
Chapter 3 ADJUST THE RADAR ECHO
Examples of the radar echo sensitivity as follows.
Radar echo sensitivity Radar echo sensitivity Radar echo sensitivity
Low Middle High
It is important to be note that if you adjust the gain level to maximum, the noise might be also displayed on the screen at the same time.
GAIN set Exceed
In the case of a fine weather, gain level is set close to the maximum values usually. In the case of a bad weather, such as heavy rain or snow or rough seas, it is necessary to adjust not only the gain level, but also the sea clutter suppression function and rain/snow clutter suppression function. You need to choose an appropriate level, respectively.
If sensitivity is set too high, unnecessary signals such as noises in the receiver and false echoes increase to lower target visibility. At the same time, if sensitivity is set too low, detection of targets such as ships and dangerous objects may be hindered. Therefore, sensitivity must always be set to an optimal level.
45
Chapter 3 ADJUST THE RADAR ECHO
3.3 SEA CLUTTER SUPPRESSION (SEA)
It is necessary to adjust the sea clutter suppression level in order to use the radar exactly. Failure to do so, it is possible to obtain an accurate radar echo.
The sea clutter suppression level is displayed at the lower part of the screen when the SEA control is turned left or right.
Turning the control right increases the value, and turning it left decreases the value.
About the SEA control : please refer to the number 12 in Chapter 2.2.
Sea Clutter suppression level
LOW
Sea Clutter suppression level
Suitable level
When using the sea clutter suppression function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the sea surface at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited. When using the sea clutter suppression function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level.
46
Chapter 3 ADJUST THE RADAR ECHO
3.4 RAIN/SNOW CLUTTER SUPPRESSION (RAIN)
It is necessary to adjust the rain/snow clutter suppression level in order to use the radar exactly. Failure to do so, it is impossible to obtain an accurate radar echo.
The rain/snow clutter suppression level is displayed at the lower part of the screen when the
RAIN control is turned left or right.
Turning the control right increases the value, and turning it left decreases the value.
About the RAIN control : please refer to the number 13 in Chapter 2.2.
Rain clutter suppression level suitable Rain clutter suppression level excessive
(fine weather) (some targets become small)
The [RAIN] control can make targets hidden by rain/snow clutter appear on the radar display.
Be careful that excessive suppression may cause small targets to be overlooked.
When using the rain/snow clutter suppression function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the rain or snow at close range. Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited. When using the rain/snow clutter suppression function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level.
47
Chapter 3 ADJUST THE RADAR ECHO
3.5 SCREEN BRILLIANCE (BRILL)
The brilliance level is displayed at the lower part of the screen when the BRILL control is turned left or right.
Turning the control right increases the value, and turning it left decreases the value.
About the BRILL control : please refer to the number 15 in Chapter 2.2.
48
Chapter 3 ADJUST THE RADAR ECHO
**** FOR REFERENCE ****
In order to obtain an accurate radar echo, sea clutter suppression adjustment and gain adjustment are essential.
RAIN: Normally is set to “0.” But in the case of rain or snow, you need use the rain clutter suppression function to remove the noise appearing on the screen.
GAIN: Adjust the GAIN to increase receiving sensitivity, then the radar observation range can be extended. If the sensitivity is set too high, the receiver noise is increase, and the contrast between the targets and the background video is reduced. As a result, the targets become obscure on the radar display. To observe densely crowded targets or short-range targets, adjust the GAIN to reduce the sensitivity so that the targets are easy to observe. However, be careful not to overlook important small targets.
SEA: SEA clutter suppression function can suppress the near range clutter noise. If the suitable adjustment is done, you can observe a clear target from short range to long range.
When the automatic mode is selected for the rain/snow clutter suppression function, the sea clutter suppression function is switched to the manual mode. The sea clutter suppression function (AUTO) and the rain/snow suppression function (AUTO) cannot be selected at the same time. In addition, Please adjust the video in function (MANUAL) usually. Please attempt the function (AUTO) when the video adjustment of short-range cannot adjust by the bad weather.
< ACTUAL OPERATION >
Set RAIN clutter suppression level to 0.
(1) Set RANGE to more than 6NM, and determine the target in the distance. The target location is far, and the targets as far possible can barely display is preferable. Set GAIN in order to observe the target clearly.
(2) Change RANGE to 0.5NM, and set SEA clutter suppression level to observe the near target clearly. If you reduce the GAIN at this time, the target that was able to display at (1) will be not able to display, please note on the relation between the long range.
(3) Since the rain/snow clutter suppression function also has the effect of suppressing sea clutter, the suppression efficiency improves when using with the [SEA] control. In general,
RAIN clutter suppression level is set to “0.” But if you encounter a bad weather, set RAIN clutter suppression level to achieve better observation state.
49
Chapter 4 VRM AND EBL FUNCTION
Chapter 4 VRM AND EBL FUNCTION
4.1 OPERATION OF VRM, EBL
VRM: After pressing the VRM button, the size of the ring can be changed by turning the MULTI control to the left or right. The VRM can be operated even by pressing the MULTI control and selecting VRM. The distance to the ring is displayed on the screen.
Erase VRM: Select the VRM to be erased by pressing the VRM button shortly, and erase it by long pressing the VRM button.
Alternatively, press the MULTI control, select VRM, and long press the MULTI control to erase.
EBL: After pressing the EBL button, the EBL can be moved by turning the MULTI control to the left or right. The EBL can be operated even by pressing the MULTI control and selecting
EBL. The direction of the line is displayed on the screen.
Erase EBL: Select the EBL to be erased by pressing the EBL button shortly, and erase it by long pressing the EBL button.
Alternatively, press the MULTI control, select EBL, and long press the MULTI control to erase.
Note:
If the VRM · EBL does not appear,
There is a possibility that has been set the setting of the display color of PPI: black and EBL / VRM: black. See 8.9.2 COLOR SETTINGS, and check.
4.2 EXAMPLE OF VRM FUNCTION
Example: VRM function
How to change the VRM
Press the VRM button, and turn the
MULTI control left or right to change the ring size.
- +
Or
50
Range from own ship to the target is displayed.
How to erase the menu dialog: press the CLR button or press the MULTI control
Press the MULTI control, select VRM1/2 and turn the MULTI control left or right to change the ring size.
- +
4.3 EXAMPLE OF EBL FUNCTION
Chapter 4 VRM AND EBL FUNCTION
Example: EBL function.
How to change the EBL
Press the EBL button, and turn the MULTI control left or right to change the EBL direction.
- +
****
Or
Target bearing is displayed.
Press the MULTI control, select
EBL1/2 and turn the MULTI control left or right to change the EBL direction.
FOR REFERENCE
-
****
ABOUT EBL/VRM FUNCTION
The target position and range information can be measured by EBL and VRM function.
Bearing measurement method:
(1) The RELATIVE BEARING which is measured from own ship heading line.
(2) The TRUE BEARING which is measured from the north line.
Certainly, TRUE BEARING is calculated by RELATIVE BEARING and GYRO BEARING.
So, to calculate the TRUE BEARING is necessary a signal from GYRO or GPS compasses.
In case of no external bearing signal, display only RELATIVE BEARING mode.
Target tracking function (TT) and display AIS symbol is necessary the GYRO or GPS compass signal.
When GYRO or GPS compass signal is received, normally azimuth is measured from the north (TRUE AZIMUTH).
This radar scanner has a microwave BEAM WIDTH is about 4 degrees (NKE-2043), 2 degrees (NKE-2063A), 1.9 degrees (NKE-2103-4) or 1.2 degrees (NKE-2103-6).
So every target echo has more than 4 degrees, 2 degrees, 1.9 degrees or 1.2 degrees width for bearing direction.
For above reason, in case of read out the target azimuth, you need set EBL line to the center of the target echo.
RANGE of target echo in any azimuth can be measured by the VRM function from own ship.
Target echo size is proportion to pulse width which transmitted from own ship.
In case of MEASURE SHORT RANGE ECHO using VRM, you need set ring to the echo’s nearest point from own ship.
At that point, you can get the correct RANGE for any pulse width.
Floating:
The base point of EBL/VRM can be set other than own ship position. Refer to "5.18.1 EBL."
+
51
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.1 PARALLEL CURSOR FUNCTION
Parallel Cursor is straight lines at equal interval that are displayed on the screen.
By using Parallel Cursor lines, complicated measurement is enabled relating to the bearing and the range by using the own ship’s position as the reference point.
Adjustment of Bearing/Interval
Press Turn Press
Turn for adjustment of bearing
OR
Turn while pressing for adjustment of interval
52
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Adjustment of Floating
By using the Floating, you can move the center of the Parallel Cursor from your ship position to any point.
Press
Turn
Reference:
The floating position of the Parallel Cursor starting point can be fixed on the radar display or at specific angle.
Floating function must be turned on to use floating.
For details of settings, see "5.18.2."
53
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Hides Parallel Cursors
Select "Parallel Cursor" on the MULTI control menu, long press the MULTI control.
Long press
54
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.2 MOB FUNCTION (MAN OVERBOARD)
MOB is the mark of a person or an object overboard. If someone or something falls overboard, set MOB to memorize the latitude/longitude of the location and display the mark. Also, a straight line from the own ship to the mark is displayed.
Start MOB Function
Connect the own ship position and the mark with dashed line during
MOB function running.
The MOB mark is displayed at current position.
Press
Reference:
If running MOB function, displays icon on left of screen.
The bearing, range, and TTG (time to go) to the MOB position are displayed at the bottom of the screen as follows.
Finish MOB Function
Press
Reselect “MOB” at MULTI control menu during MOB function running.
Confirmation is displayed.
Are you sure to finish MOB Function?
55
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.3 ANCHOR WATCH FUNCTION
56
Anchor Watch is a function that sets a circular dragging anchor monitoring area around the own ship and realizes safe voyage by generating an anchor alarm when a part of the outline of the own ship exceeded the monitoring area.
Start Anchor Watch function
Display the monitoring circle at own ship position.
Change the radius of monitoring circle.
Press
Turn
Press
Fix the monitoring circle.
In action Anchor Watch
The following screen will be displayed during the anchor watching.
Monitoring circle and anchor position
Bearing from own ship to anchor position.
Distance from anchor position.
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Reference:
If running Anchor Watch, displays icon on left of screen.
Finish Anchor Watch function
Press
If select “Finish”, the monitoring circle is removed.
Press
Turn
Press
If select “Change Radius”, the radius of the monitoring circle can be changed.
57
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.4 VECTOR LENGTH
The Vector Length is set in min in the range from 1 min to 60 min.
For vector mode of settings, see "5.21 VECTOR."
Settings Vector Length
Press
Turn
Press
Reference:
The following figure shows an example in which the Vector Length is set to 6 min, and the tip of the vector represents the target's position expected to reach 6 minutes later.
58
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.5 RADAR TRAILS
Radar Trails is can be used to figure out how well you can navigate an obstacle and how well you can keep the bearing that have set for your ship.
The echo trail is displayed on the radar display screen so you can easily assess visually what is going on.
5.5.1 SETUP THE RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL
You can be selected in the range of Trail Length set by Max Interval.
For Max Length of settings, see "8.2 TRAILS.
”
Short :
Middle :
OFF/15sec/30sec/1min/2min/3min/4min/5min/6min/10min/15min/Continuous
OFF/30sec/1min/2min/3min/4min/5min/6min/10min/15min/30min/Continuous
Long : OFF/1min/2min/3min/4min/5min/6min/10min/15min/30min/1hour/Continuous
Super Long : OFF/30min/1hour/2hour/3hour/4hour/5hour/6hour/10hour/12hour/24hour/Continuous
Settings Radar Trails interval
Press
Turn
Press
59
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.6 AIS OPERATIONS
AIS is shows the target's information on the radar display, using other ship's information sent out from the AIS unit.
Reference:
To use this function, ship’s heading, position and AIS information are required.
For AIS function of settings, see "5.24 AIS/TT."
The specified target data is displayed.
BRG and RNG shows the relative positional information which is observed from the own ship. COG and SOG shows ground speed and ground course of the target. Position information is measured through the GPS which is equipped to the ship.
The target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost, or until another target is designated.
The displayed AIS data can be closed by press the CLR button.
Press
60
AIS No. CPA
Ship ’s name TCPA:
BRG: Target bearing from own ship direction.
HDG: The ship ’s heading.
COG: The ship’s course over ground.
SOG: The ship’s speed over ground.
ROT: The ship ’s rotation.
Draft: The ship ’s draft.
RNG:
Closest point of approach
Time to CPA
Target range from own ship position.
MMSI: The ship’s MMSI (Country).
Call Sign The ship’s call sign.
Type
B/L:
The ship’s ship type.
The ship ’s beam/length.
The ship ’s navigation status
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Display AIS ship name on the screen using MULTI control menu.
Ship name display
Press
Turn
Press
61
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.6.1 AIS LIST
The list of displaying AIS can be checked.
Procedures
Turn
Press
Press
Turn
62
Press
Reference:
Dangerous ship targets are displayed with a red icon in the AIS List.
Press
Press
Reference:
Symbols displayed in the AIS list
# Numeric display
Information is displayed even if the list is closed (only one ship)
$ Destination ship
* Retrieved Vessel
Destination ships and Retrieved Vessels can be set in Main Menu
Refer to 5.24 AIS/TT.
Symbols of AIS displayed on the screen
Numeric display
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Retrieved Vessel
Destination ship
AIS SART
63
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.7 TT OPERATIONS
To use the target tracking function, direction signal and GPS signal information are required. The target tracking function calculates the course and speed of a target by automatically tracking the target's move. If there is a possibility of a collision, an alarm can be sounded.
Note:
There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and target tracking functions.
[I] Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic target tracking
Depending on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between adjacent targets during automatic target tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0.03 to 0.05 NM. If multiple targets approach each other, resolution will become about 0.05 NM and this may cause the system to regard them as one target and thus to swap them or lose part of them. Such swapping or less of targets may also occur if the picture of the target being tracked is affected by rain/snow clutter or sea clutter or moves very close to land.
[II] Intensity of echoes and the target tracking function
The intensity of echoes and the tracking function have a correlation ship, and thus the target will be lost if no echoes are detected during seven scans in succession.
If a lost target exists, therefore, radar gain must be increased to support detection of the target. If, however, radar gain is increased too significantly, sea clutter or other noise may be erroneously detected and tracked as a target, and resultingly, a false alarm may be issued. To execute accurate tracking, it becomes necessary to appropriately adjust the [GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] controls of the radar so that the target to be acquired and tracked id clearly displayed on the radar display. Inappropriate settings of these adjustments reduce the reliability / accuracy of automatic tracking.
CAUTION
Use the radar only as a navigation aid.
The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground.
Use the target tracking function (TT) only as a navigation aid.
The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the target tracking function (TT) information may cause accidents.
The target tracking function (TT) information such as vector, target numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors. Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be acquired or tracked.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground.
64
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
TT information display
If select TT symbol on PPI, the TT numerical information is displayed bottom of screen.
Move the cursor on TT and press the ENT button.
TT No.
COG: Course over ground
SOG: Speed over ground
CPA:
Status TCPA:
BRG: Target bearing from own ship RNG:
Closest point of approach
Time to CPA
Target range from own ship position
CPA Limit: CPA setting value (see 5.24.2)
TCPA Limit: TCPA setting value (see 5.24.3)
Reference :
The following status is shown in “Status.”
Acquiring Initial acquiring.
Tracking Tracking target that is not a dangerous or lost.
Danger
Lost
Dangerous ship.
The ship icon at the bottom left of the information screen is displayed in red.
Lost tracked target.
65
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
TT List operation
Press
“#” means displaying numerical info.
Press
Reference:
TT List is displayed as follows.
Turn
Press
Press
Press
Turn
TT List
No.01
CPA[NM] TCPA[min] BRG[ ° ] RNG[NM] COG[ ° ] SOG[knot]
Press
1.12
Cancel the all acquisition TT
1 275.3
Turn
1.26 180
Press
4.05
66
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Reference:
Manual acquisition
The target can be acquired manually by following procedures.
1. Move the cross cursor to location where want to acquire with the MULTI control or the cross key.
2. Press the ENT button.
3. Wait about one minute.
Cancel the acquired target
The target can be canceled manually by following procedures.
1. Move the cross cursor to target where want to cancel with the MULTI control or the cross key.
2. Press the CLR button.
Symbols of AIS displayed on the screen
Symbol Definition Remarks
Initial acquisition
Tracking target
Dangerous target
Lost
Selection/
Numerical display
This symbol is displayed where the target is acquired.
This is displayed with a circle of thin dotted line.
This symbol is also used for the target acquired automatically.
This symbol is displayed for the target which becomes the tracking target after acquired.
This is displayed with a circle of thick line.
This symbol is displayed when the tracking target becomes a dangerous target with CPA/TCPA decision.
This is displayed with a circle of thick line (basic color is red).
This blinks while this is not acknowledged. Then, it stops blinking when it is acknowledged.
When there are some dangerous targets, targets which is not acknowledged blinks, and targets which has been acknowledged does not blink.
When a tracking target is no longer detected as a target, this symbol is superimpose-displayed on the target symbol.
This is displayed with cross lines.
This is superimpose-displayed on tracking targets or dangerous targets
When selecting a tracking target to display its numeric information, this symbol is superimpose-displayed on the selected target.
This is displayed with a split square.
This is superimpose-displayed on tracking targets or dangerous targets.
67
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.8 OFF-CENTER FUNCTION
The own ship's display position can be moved to any point within 66% of the screen radius.
The position setting is registered in advance in the MULTI control menu.
Therefore, the position can be changed quickly according to the purpose.
The registered position settings are as follows.
・ Right 44%
・ Left 44%
・ Backward 44%
・ Backward 66%
・ Previous
Reference:
In the Main Menu, the offcenter position can be set to other positions.
Refer to “5.22 OFFCENTER SETTING” for detailed setting method.
If select the "Previous" from the MULTI control menu, the position even where set in "5.22
OFFCENTER SETTING" can be set.
Procedures
Press Press
68
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.9 MARK FUNCTION
Marks can be indicated at any positions on the screen.
A mark created on the screen holds the latitude and longitude.
Make Mark
Press
Cursor shape changes.
Press
A mark can be put.
69
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Add/Remove the Mark
Press
Turn
Press
If select “Remove”, the cursor shape changes select cursor.
Press
Press
Turn or
Cross Key
If select “Insert”, a mark can be added.
Move the cursor on the mark, then cursor changes eraser icon.
The mark can be removed.
The Mark function memorizes the position using latitude and longitude. GPS position information signal must be input. Therefore, this function cannot be used unless GPS is input.
The position of the mark on the screen changes following the latitude and longitude.
If change the size, color, or type of t he mark, see “5.29 MARK SETTING.”
70
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Reference:
List of mark types that can be set
× type
+ type
Y type
Drum type
Delete All Marks
To delete the set marks at once, focus on the Mark on the MULTI menu and long press the MULTI control.
Displays the delete confirmation screen.
Select YES, the all marks will be deleted at once.
Long press
71
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.10 LINE FUNCTION
Lines can be indicated at any positions on the screen.
A line created on the screen holds the latitude and longitude.
Make Line
The cursor shape changes.
The start point is set.
The cursor shape is changes.
Press Press
Press
Turn or Cross Key
Operation of the MULTI control:
Turn left: moves the cursor to left.
Turn right: moves the cursor to right.
Turn left while pressing: moves the cursor down.
Turn right while pressing: moves the cursor up.
Place the middle point.
A line can be drawn with the placed point as the starting point again.
Press
Press CLR button to finish.
Press
72
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Add/Remove the Line
Press
Press
Turn
Press
If select “Modify”, the cursor shape changes.
Turn or Cross Key
Press
If select “Insert”, a line can be added.
Press
Turn
If select
“Remove”, the cursor shape changes to select cursor. or Cross Key
Press
Move the cursor on the vertex of line, then cursor changes to eraser icon.
The line can be removed.
Move the cursor to the vertex of line, then cursor changes to edit icon (pencil icon).
The mode changes to edit mode.
The line can be modified.
The Line function memorizes the position using latitude and longitude. GPS position information signal must be input. Therefore, this function cannot be used unless GPS is input.
The position of the line on the screen changes following the latitude and longitude.
If change the color or type of the line , see “5.31 LINE SETTING.”
73
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Reference:
Delete All Lines
To delete the set lines at once, focus on the Line on the MULTI menu and long press the MULTI control.
Displays the delete confirmation screen.
Select YES, the all lines will be deleted at once.
Long press
74
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.11 OWNSHIP MARK FUNCTION
Marks can be indicated at own ship's position on the screen.
A mark created on the screen holds the latitude and longitude.
Make Ownship Mark
Press
A mark is put at current position.
Add/Remove the Ownship Mark
Press
Turn
Press
Press
Press
If sel ect “Remove”, the cursor changes to select cursor
The mark can be removed.
If sel ect “Insert”, a mark is added.
Turn or
Cross Key
Move cursor on the ownship mark, then cursor changes to eraser icon.
75
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
The Ownship Mark function memorizes the position using latitude and longitude. GPS position information signal must be input. Therefore, this function cannot be used unless GPS is input.
The position of the mark on the screen changes following the latitude and longitude.
If change the size, color or type of the mark, see “5.30 OWNSHIP MARK SETTING.”
Reference:
List of mark types that can be set
× type
+ type
Y type
Drum type
Delete All Ownship Marks
To delete the set marks at once, focus on the Ownship Mark on the MULTI menu and long press the
MULTI control.
Displays the delete confirmation screen.
Select YES, the all marks will be deleted at once.
Long press
76
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.12 USER OPTION KEYS
Press
USER1 and USER2 buttons can be assigned menu shortcuts for each short press/long press.
The frequently used menus can be called up immediately.
Registration procedure (The images are examples)
Long press
Press
Turn
Press
Confirmation and cancellation of registered contents
Turn
Press
Press
Press
77
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Reference:
When the Capture function or TLL Tx function are assigned to the USER1 or USER2 button, those functions and the function registered with the user registration menu operates simultaneously.
5.13 MODE FUNCTION
By pressing the FUNC button, it is possible to switch to a mode according to the observation scene.
It is also possible to change to the desired video settings using each mode.
For details, refer to “5.23 FUNCTION SETTING.”
Press
Note:
When the function setting is "None", the values set in various processing setting items other than the
"Function Setting" menu are applied.
78
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Note:
If "Default" is described in the following antenna heights, the antenna height setting value set in the "Adjust
Menu" is applied.
Initial value of each function mode
Mode
Setting item
IR
Process
Target Enhance
AUTO STC/FTC
Standard Coast
Middle
OFF
Level 2
OFF
Middle
3Scan
CORREL
Level 2
OFF
Narrow
Level 3
Deepsea
Middle
3Scan
CORREL
Level 2 Level 2
AUTO STC OFF
Wide1
Level 1
Fishnet
Middle
5Scan
CORREL
Wide 2
Level 1
Bird
Low
Level 2
User
*For stormy weather
Middle
Peak Hold 5Scan
CORREL
Level 1
AUTO STC AUTO STC +
AUTO FTC
Max
Level 1
Wide2
Level 1
Video Latitude
Video Noise
Rejection
Trails Interval
Trails Mode
Threshold
Normal
Level 2
OFF
True
Level 4
Time/All Combine OFF
MAX Interval Short
PRF
Antenna Height
Normal
Default
3 min
True
Level 4
OFF
Short
3 min
True
Level 4
OFF
Short
3 min
True
Level 4
OFF
Short
High Power Normal
5 - 10m 10 - 20m
Normal
Default
3 min
True
Level 4
OFF
Short
3 min
True
Level 4
OFF
Short
High Power Normal
20m - 20m -
79
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.14 SETTING DISPLAY BRILLIANCE AND COLOR
The BRILL control has three functions that can be used to easily change the color and brightness of the screen.
① Turn the BRILL control
By turning the BRILL control, change the brightness of the screen.
② Press the BRILL control
By pressing the BRILL control, switch the color in order to Day -> Dusk -> Night.
To change the color displayed in each mode, see “8.9.2 DISPLAY COLOR.”
③ Long press the BRILL control
Press
By long pressing the BRILL control, screen brightness turns to level 100 (maximum).
80
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.15 CURSOR FUNCTION
Information on the cross cursor can be displayed on the screen.
・ Distance and direction from own ship to cursor position
・ Latitude and longitude of the cursor position
・ Arrival time to current cursor position
The cursor function is OFF in the initial state.
Refer to “8.9.3 OPERATION NUMERIC DISPLAY” for the setting method.
Note:
It is recommended to set this function after the Numeric Display (4).
The Numeric Display (0) to (3) have been used for another function in the initial state. If change those settings, the speed display and coordinate position display may not be displayed.
81
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.16 RADAR ECHO SETTING
It is used when you want to adjust the settings of your favorite radar image.
① Press the MENU button.
② Select “RADAR Echo.”
Pulse Width
IR
Target Enhance
Process
③ Select each menu.
Zoom Mode
Video Noise Rejection
Video Latitude
82
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.16.1 PULSE WIDTH
You can change the transmission pulse width. Options of the transmitter pulse width vary depending on the range. For details, see following list.
Range
0.125NM
0.25NM
0.5NM
0.75NM
1.5NM
3NM
6NM
12NM
24NM
48NM
72NM
Pulse Width
(JMA-3404)
SP1
SP1
SP1/MP1
SP2/MP1
SP2/MP1/MP2
SP3/MP1/MP2
MP2/LP1/LP2
MP2/LP1/LP2
LP2
LP2
-
Pulse Width
(JMA-3406)
SP1
SP1
SP1/MP1
SP2/MP1
SP2/MP1/MP2
SP3/MP1/MP2
MP2/LP1/LP2
MP2/LP1/LP2
LP2
LP2
-
Pulse Width
(JMA-3411)
SP
SP
SP/MP1
SP/MP1
SP/MP1/MP2
MP1/MP2/LP1
MP2/LP1/LP2
MP2/LP1/LP2
LP2
LP2
LP2
SP(Short Pulse): The transmission pulse width becomes shorter, and the range resolution improved.
The suppression of sea clutter or rain/snow clutter is heightened.
Recommended conditions are following.
・ In bays/harbors and narrow waterway where targets are densely crowed.
・ Rough sea state due to torrential rain or stormy weather.
MP(Middle Pulse): The normal transmission pulse width is set. Both range resolution and sensitivity are appropriately set. Recommended conditions are General navigation.
LP(Long Pulse): The transmission pulse width becomes longer, and sensitivity improved.
Small targets are zoomed and are easy to observe. When the sea state is bad, detection performance decreases. Recommended conditions are following.
・ Detection of small targets in good weather conditions, at long range.
5.16.2 IR (INTERFERENCE REJECTION)
You can eliminate the interference from other radars by setting an appropriate IR level. However, if a higher
IR level is selected, the detection of small targets such as buoys and small boats become difficult. In general
“Low” level should be selected.
83
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.16.3 TARGET ENHANCE
The dimension of video display is enlarged by the target enhancement function. And radar echo display of two targets is closing in angle and distance. As a result, may be displayed in PPI screen as one target.
OFF: Select this mode particularly when resolution is required.
Level1: Select this mode in general.
Expand the radar echo area at 1 step for vertical direction and at 1 step for horizontal direction.
Level2: Select this mode to easily view the radar video.
Expand the radar echo area at 1 step for vertical direction and at 2 steps for horizontal direction.
Level3: Select this mode to detect small targets such as buoys.
Expand the radar echo area at 2 steps for vertical direction and at 3 steps for horizontal direction.
When Level3 is selected, sea clutter and rain/snow clutter are apt to be enhanced.
When using this enhance mode, suppress sea clutter and rain/snow clutter. For details of settings, refer to
“3.3 SEA CLUTTER SUPPRESSION (SEA)” and “3.4 RAIN/SNOW CLUTTER SUPPRESSION (RAIN).”
In general, Level1 or Level2 should be selected.
5.16.4 PROCESS
This function reduces unnecessary noise to highlight targets. When viewing a radar beacon, SART signal, or fast moving target on the radar display, do not use this function. This function is suitable for using in TM mode.
The bearing data input is required for video processing.
OFF: Select this mode in general.
3Scan-CORREL: Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter are detected.
4Scan-CORREL: Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter.
5Scan-CORREL: Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter.
Remain: Select this mode when own ship yaws wildly.
Peak Hold: Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low.
When “CORREL” is set, the image becomes smaller. When “Remain” or “Peak Hold” is set, the afterimage will appear.
5.16.5 ZOOM MODE
This function is zooming in the radar video display.
There are two type of zoom mode, “Zoom x2” and “Zoom Circle.”
“Zoom x2” doubles the size of radar video. The display is zoomed around the own ship's position as the center when this function is executed.
While this function is performed, range is displayed by half.
This function is turned off when range is changed.
“Zoom Circle” is turned on, the zoom circle displayed on the PPI.
84
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
The zoom circle can be moved by operating cross key or the MULTI control.
Both of the functions are cannot be used in minimum range.
5.16.6 VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
This function rejects signals that assumed as noise and clutter in radar videos.
OFF: Turns off the noise rejection function, and displays all signals. Targets are popped up from noise and displayed like analog signals.
Level1: Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and clutter). When detection of targets or unwanted waves in no definite, the signals are displayed. When detection of targets is definite, the signals are displayed.
Level2: Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and clutter). When detection of targets or unwanted waves in no definite, the signals are displayed. When detection of targets is definite, the signals are displayed. It will remove the signal that can be regarded as unnecessary wave of more than level 1.
Level3: Select if “Level1” and “Level2” cannot reject the signals enough.
5.16.7 VIDEO LATITUDE
Select the dynamic range in which receiving signals are to be shown on the radar display.
Narrow: Narrows the dynamic range at short range.
Normal: Standard setting. The dynamic range varies depending on the actual range.
Wide1: Use this mode when rainy weather intensifies unwanted waves. The dynamic range is about twice as wide as when Normal is selected.
Wide2: Use this mode when rain clouds remain even when using Wide1.
Max: Use this mode when you want to fine-tune the image for weak reflectors such as rain clouds.
Dynamic range is 2.5 ~ 5 times as large as normal.
Select Normal in standard, and Wide1 in rainy weather. Narrow clearly displays short-range videos when
STC is used in manual mode.
85
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.17 TUNE
Automatic tuning mode (AUTO) and manual tuning mode (MANUAL) are provide. In the automatic tuning mode, transmission and receiving frequencies are tuned and adjusted automatically. In the manual tuning mode, tuning is carried out by yourself.
When “AUTO” is selected, the equipment automatically adjust tuning. Tuning is adjusted when the range is changed or pulse width is changed.
When “MANUAL” is selected, adjust the video to be the largest by observing the tune indicator bar. Because the tune indicator bar is the guide during manual tuning, adjust the tune indicator bar to the maximum.
①
Press the MENU button. ② Select “Tune.” ③ Select “Manual” or “Auto.”
Manual Selected
④
Use the cross key or the MULTI control to adjust the tuning bar.
Auto Selected
86
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.18 MARKER
Set operations for EBLs, parallel cursors, cursors and range rings.
Set also unit of VRMs.
① Press the MENU button.
② Select “Marker.”
③ Select each menu.
EBL Setting Parallel cursor VRM Unit Cursor Mode Range Ring
5.18.1 EBL SETTING
Set operation for EBLs.
Set the mode to move the starting point of EBL ( “Floating”).
Floating Off: Floating mode is disabled.
Screen FIX: The starting point of EBL is fixed on the radar display.
Lat/Lon Fix: The starting point of EBL is fixed at specific latitude and longitude.
Set the EBL bearing fix mode ( “Bearing Mode”).
Bearing Mode True: EBL bearing is fixed to the true bearing you set.
Relative: EBL bearing is fixed as an angle from own ship heading..
These settings can be set to each EBL.
87
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.18.2 PARALLEL CURSOR
Set the operation for parallel cursors.
When a range is switched, parallel cursors link to a radar range scale for display ( “Range Scale Link”).
Range Scale Link Off: If the range is switched, the width between parallel index lines changes in accordance with the radar range scale.
On: If the range is switched, the width between parallel index lines remains fixed.
Set the mode to move the starting point of parallel cursors ( “Floating”).
Floating Off: Floating mode is disabled.
Screen Fix: Fixes the start point of parallel cursor to the radar display.
Lat/Lon Fix: The starting point of parallel cursor is fixed at specific latitude and longitude.
Set bearing fix mode of parallel cursors ( “Bearing Mode”).
Bearing Mode Angle Fix: The angle of the parallel cursors is set in true bearing.
For N Up and C Up, the cursors are displayed in true bearing irrespective of changes in the course of own ship.
For H Up, the angle of the parallel cursors changes as the course of own ship changes.
Screen Fix: Fix the parallel cursor display to the radar display.
The angle of the parallel cursors stays the same on the screen regardless of own ship movement.
When own ship is engaged in TM motions, the parallel cursors move as own ship moves.
Heading Fix: The parallel cursors are displayed while the relative angle of the ship's heading bearing line stays the same.
For H Up, the ship's heading bearing line does not change even though the course of own ship changes; therefore, the parallel cursors do not move.
For N Up, the ship's heading bearing line changes as the course of own ship changes; therefore, the parallel cursors also change as the course of own ship changes.
Select "One Side" or "Both Sides" for parallel cursor display ( “One/Both Sides”).
One Side: The parallel cursors are displayed in "One Side" mode.
Both Sides: The parallel cursors are displayed in "Both Sides" mode.
Individual parallel cursors can be displayed/hidden ( “Display For Individual Line”).
Display For Individual Line Off: The parallel cursor is not displayed.
On: The parallel cursor is displayed.
The line nearest to the own ship is specified as Line1.
88
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.18.3 VRM UNIT
Set the VRM unit.
The unit can be selected from following.
NM/km/sm/Link Range
5.18.4 CURSOR MODE
This function enables the setting of detail information about cursor display.
Set the bearing mode, length, unit and pattern of cursor.
Set the bearing mode of cursor ( “Bearing Mode”). Bearing mode is selected “True” or “Relative.”
When “True” is selected, true bearing of cursor is displayed.
When “Relative” is selected, the relative angle of the own ship's heading bearing is displayed as the bearing of cursor.
Set the distance unit for cursor ( “Unit”).
Unit is selected from “NM”, “km”, “sm” and “Link Range.”
Set the length of the cross cursor mark on the radar display ( “Size”).
Select the type of the cursor mark on the radar display ( “Pattern”).
Pattern is selected from following list.
Thin Cross
Thin Cross
(Empty of Center)
Thick Cross
Thick Cross
(Empty of Center)
Numeric display uses these settings of bearing mode and unit in this function.
For details of numeric display setting, see “8.9.5 NUMERIC DISPLAY.”
89
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.18.5 RANGE RING
Set the display of range ring on the radar screen.
If turn on, the range rings are displayed.
Range Ring
90
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.19 SET OWN SHIP MOVEMENT
① Press the MENU button.
② Select
“Set Own Ship Movement.”
③ Select each menu.
TM/RM Bearing Mode
TM/RM: Switches between true and relative motion display modes. The bearing signal input is required to display true motion.
In the true motion display mode, the own ship’s position on the radar screen moves depending on its speed and course and the influence of the current. Land and other fixed targets are fixed on the radar screen and only actually moving targets move on the radar screen.
Bearing mode: Selects the azimuth of the radar video.
The bearing signal input is required to display N-UP/C-UP.
91
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Head Up (H-UP) mode is displayed so that the ship’s heading line points to the zenith of the PPI. Since targets are displayed in their direction relative to the ship’s heading line, the operator can view the video in the same field of view as in operating the ship at sea. This mode is suitable for watching over other ships.
North Up (N-UP) mode is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI points to the due north. Fixed targets do no flicker and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of a target can easily be read out.
Course Up (C-UP) mode is fixed pointing to the zenith of the PPI points to the due north. In the same way as in the N-UP mode, fixed targets do not flicker, and are stabilized even if the ship is yawing. The bearing of the heading line varies by the same shift of own ship’s course. If the course is changed while “Course Up” is selected, the latest course will be displayed top of the radar screen by selecting “Course Up Reset.”
5.20 TRAILS SETTING
Set radar trails.
① Press the MENU button.
② Select
“Trails.”
To 5.20.1
To 5.20.2
To 5.20.3
Threshold
Time/All Combine
Trails Mode
③ Select each menu.
92
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.20.1 THRESHOLD
Set the threshold level for making radar trails.
The threshold is higher in the order of level 1 < level 2 < level 3 < level 4.
If the threshold is low, radar trails are plotted even for weak echoes.
If the threshold is high, radar trails are only plotted for strong echoes.
⚫ When radar trails are plotted with unwanted waves, change to a higher level.
⚫ To thin radar trails, change to a higher level.
⚫ If radar trails are plotted in snatches, change to a lower level.
5.20.2 TIME/ALL COMBINE
This function superimpose-displays time radar trails and continuous radar trails.
Normally, time radar trails have priority, but if continuous radar trail is selected in the MULTI control menu, only continuous radar trails is displayed.
5.20.3 TRAILS MODE
Switch the radar trail display between true and relative motion trail modes.
True motion trails: The system plots the absolute motion trails of a target, irrespective of own ship’s position.
The operator can easily judge the course and speed of the target.
The system does not plot the trails of land and other fixed targets.
Relative motion trails: The system plots the trails of a target at a position relative to the own ship.
The operator can easily judge whether the target is approaching the own ship.
While the own ship is moving, the system also plots the trails when the own ship is turning.
93
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.21 VECTOR
Set TT and AIS vector settings. The bearing and speed signal input are required to display TT and AIS vectors.
① Press the MENU button.
Vector Mode
② Select the
“Vector.”
③ Select each menu.
Display Own Ship ’s Vector Own Ship Vector Line Width
94
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.21.1 VECTOR MODE
Set the bearing mode of TT and AIS vectors.
In the True vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of the target and its vector length is proportional to its speed. In this mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and easily monitored.
The relative vector does not represent the true motion of the target, but its relative relation with own ship. This means that a target with its relative vector directed to own ship will be a dangerous target.
The vector length of a target is proportional to its speed, and the vector time can be switched in a range of 1 to 60 minutes.
5.21.2 DISPLAY OWN SHIP ’S VECTOR
Turn on/off own ship vector display.
5.21.3 OWN SHIP VECTOR LINE WIDTH
Set the width of own ship vector line.
95
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.22 OFFCENTER SETTING
The display of own ship's position can be moved to any position within 66% of the display radius.
This setting can be unset.
① Press the MENU button.
② Select
“Offcenter.”
⑤ Operate the cross key or the MULTI control to set the position.
To cancel the position setting, press the CLR button before setting.
⑥ Press the ENT button or the MULTI control, the position is set and the own ship's display position is moved.
③ Select “Set Position.”
④ Menu display is disappeared and screen display become Set Position mode.
Select “Remove”, the set position is cancelled.
・ The own ship’s display position returns to the center of the display in
RM mode.
・ The own ship ’s display position is reset to the position of 66% of the screen radius opposite to the ship's heading direction in TM mode.
96
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.23 FUNCTION SETTING
“Function Setting” is provided for always obtaining the best radar video by storing complex radar signal processing settings in the optimum status by use, and calling the setting in accordance with the conditions for using the function.
Functions are factory-set for general use, and the settings can be fine adjusted by operating the menu.
You can select one of 6 function modes. The factory presetting is shown below.
Function 1: Standard Suitable for general monitoring.
Function 2: Coast Useful for observing short-range videos.
Function 3: Deepsea Suitable for general ocean navigation.
Function 4: Fishnet Useful for small target.
Function 5: Bird
Function 6: User
Useful for a flock of seabirds.
This mode is for users to save and use their preferred settings, when the 5 modes above are not applicable.
The default setting is for a stormy weather.
① Press the MENU button.
② Select “Function Setting.” ③ Select each mode.
To 5.23.1
To 5.23.2
Choose Standard in this example setting.
There is no difference in setting menu other than Standard.
To 5.23.3
To 5.23.4
To 5.23.5
About the following settings, refer to "5.16 RADAR ECHO
SETTING".
・ IR
・ Process
・ Target Enhance
・ Video Latitude
・ Video Noise Rejection
Press the cross key (down) or turn the
MULTI control to move to the next page.
About the following settings, refer to "5.20 TRAILS
SETTING".
・ Trails Mode
・ Trails REF Level
・ Time/All Combine
About the following setting, refer to "8.2 TRAILS".
・ MAX Interval
Press the cross key (down) or turn the
MULTI control to move to the next page.
About the following setting, refer to "8.4.5 PRF".
・ PRF
To 5.23.6
97
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.23.1 FUNCTION ENABLE/DISABLE
Set whether this mode is called when press the FUNC button.
If “Function Enable/Disable” is set to “Off”, this mode is not displayed when switching operation mode of the
FUNC button.
5.23.2 AUTO STC/FTC
Set the auto STC/FTC setting.
Detects unwanted waves such as rain/snow clutter and sea clutter and automatically suppresses them.
When the sea state or weather changes, this function automatically performs suppression processing in accordance with the situation.
Suppression processing is not full automatic, and requires the operator to control the afterimages of unwanted waves.
To control the afterimage of sea clutter, use the SEA control.
To control the afterimage of rain/snow clutter, use the RAIN control.
In areas where the density of unwanted waves is low, unwanted waves may remain being judged as targets.
Thus, use the automatic clutter suppression mode together with the video process mode.
OFF: Disables the automatic clutter suppression function.
Select "OFF" when rain/snow clutter and sea clutter are not strong or when the ship is in a bay.
AUTO STC: Automatically detects the strength of sea clutter, and performs the most suitable sea clutter suppression processing.
Even when the strength of sea clutter varies depending on the wind direction, AUTO STC performs the most suitable suppression processing.
Land like islands can be displayed naturally.
Since rain clouds outside sea clutter areas are recognized as land, there is no effect of suppressing rain/snow clutter.
Use the RAIN control to set the rain/snow clutter suppression function.
AUTO FTC: This function automatically detects the strength of rain/snow clutter, and performs the most suitable rain/snow clutter suppression processing.
Since land is recognized as rain clouds, land videos become obscure.
There is no effect of automatic suppressing sea clutter.
Use the SEA control to set the sea clutter suppression function.
AUTO STC + AUTO FTC: This function set both STC and FTC to AUTO.
98
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.23.3 TRAILS INTERVAL
Set the interval of radar trails.
The options in this menu depend on the setting of MAX Interval (refer to “5.23 FUNCTION SETTING”, “8.2
TRAILS ”).
If MAX Interval setting is changed, this menu is set the shortest interval in the setting (except “Off”).
5.23.4 ANTENNA HEIGHT
Set the antenna height used in the function mode.
When default is selected, the value set in the Basic Adjustment is applied.
For Basic Adjustment, refer to “7.5 ANTENNA HEIGHT SETUP.”
5.23.5 SAVE PRESENT STATE
Not function setting but the current status set in the main menu (for example, “5.16 RADAR ECHO SETTING” and “5.20 TRAILS SETTING”) is saved as the setting value of the selected function mode.
The confirmation dialog window is displayed. Select “YES”, the operation is executed.
5.23.6 INITIALIZE
Initialize a selected function setting mode. The initialized mode values are set to the factory-set values.
About the factory-set values of each function setting mode, refer to “5.13 SWITCH THE FUNCTION.”
The confirmation dialog window is displayed. Select “YES”, the operation is executed.
99
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.24 AIS/TT
It is used when you want to set about function of target tracking function (TT) and AIS.
① Press the MENU button.
② Select
“AIS/TT.”
③ Select each menu.
Press the cross key (down) or turn the MULTI control to move to the next page.
TT Function On/Off
AIS Function On/Off
CPA Limit
TCPA Limit
CPA Ring
For details about each function, see 5.24.1 ~ 5.24.12
Target Number Display
TT/AIS
Target Number Allocation
TLL Target Number Allocation
ALR Alarm From AIS
AIS Display Target
AIS Destination Ship
AIS Retrieved Vessel
AIS Filter
100
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.24.1 FUNCTION ON/OFF
Turn on/off the function of TT and AIS.
5.24.2 CPA LIMIT
Set the distance to CPA (Closest Point of Approach). Use the cross key or the MULTI control to change the value.
The CPA limit value can be set 0.0 NM or between 0.1 and 9.9 NM.
Note:
If "CPA" is set to 0.0NM, TT (CPA/TCPA) alarm will not be generated.
The TT (CPA/TCPA) alarm is an alarm that can be generated only with the TT function, and does not generate an alarm with the AIS function.
5.24.3 TCPA LIMIT
Set the distance to TCPA (Time to CPA). Use the cross key or the MULTI control to change the value.
The TCPA limit value can be set 0min or between 1 and 99 min.
Note:
If "TCPA" is set to 0 min, TT (CPA/TCPA) alarm will not be generated.
The TT (CPA/TCPA) alarm is an alarm that can be generated only with the TT function, and does not generate an alarm with the AIS function.
5.24.4 CPA RING
Set the display of CPA ring. While the distance of the specified CPA Limit value is used as the radius, the
CPA ring is displayed with a white circle of which center is the own ship's position.
The CPA ring is not displayed when the true vector mode is selected.
5.24.5 TARGET NUMBER DISPLAY
A target ID number is a value displayed beside the target symbol or AIS symbol. These numbers are assigned to targets in acquisition order automatically. The start number can be specified by “Target Number
Allocation ” (see “5.24.6 TARGET NUMBER ALLOCATION”). Each target is identified by the assigned ID number until it is lost or its acquisition is canceled.
Turn on/off the number of tracking target and AIS symbol.
An ID number is always displayed for only targets with which numeric data is displayed.
101
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.24.6 TARGET NUMBER ALLOCATION
The start number of targets can be specified for the target symbol or AIS symbol. Use the cross key or the
MULTI control to change the value.
The start numbers of TT and AIS target can be specified respectively.
The start number of TT can be set between 0 and 70.
The start number of AIS can be set between 0 and 900.
5.24.7 TLL TARGET NUMBER ALLOCATION
Select the position that it output as the position of the TLL sentence. The position can be selected from own ship’s position or the cursor position.
The target number for TLL sentence can be specified.
5.24.8 ALR ALARM FROM AIS
Set the display of NMEA ALR sentence received from AIS.
5.24.9 AIS DISPLAY TARGET
Set the number of AIS display targets. Set this to get a better look at the screen by limiting the number of AIS symbols.
5.24.10 AIS DESTINATION SHIP
Set the MMSI of the AIS destination ship. Use the cross key or the MULTI control to change the value.
If unsetting t he AIS destination ship, input “0.”
5.24.11 AIS RETRIEVED VESSEL
Set the MMSI of the AIS retrieved vessel. Use the cross key or the MULTI control to change the value.
AIS retrieved vessel can be set up to 10 vessels.
If unsetting the AIS retrieved vessel , input “0.”
5.24.12 AIS FILTER
Set the range of AIS filter. Use the cross key or the MULTI control to change the value.
102
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.25 GUARD ZONE
This function sounds an alarm by detecting the movement of the target in the created zone.
Two fan-shaped zones can be created. Zone alarm level and mode can be set for each zone.
The automatic acquisition function (Auto TT) can be set to the zone.
Note:
The guard zone for which the Auto TT function can be set is only zone 1. An alarm function other than the
Auto TT function can be set in zone 2.
① Press the MENU button.
② Select
“Guard Zone.”
③ Select each menu.
Zone Alarm Level
Zone Mode
Each Zone 2 setting menu is the same as Zone 1.
103
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.25.1 ZONE ALARM LEVEL
Detection levels of guard zone can be set to issue alarms.
Detection level can be set between 1 and 4. When setting to lower level of detection, the alarm operates for weaker targets. When setting to higher level of detection, be careful because the alarm may not operate properly.
・ ”Zone 1 Alarm Level” is setting for guard zone 1.
・ ”Zone 2 Alarm Level” is setting for guard zone 2.
5.25.2 ZONE MODE
Note:
The guard zone for which the Auto TT function can be set is only zone 1. An alarm function other than the
Auto TT function can be set in zone 2.
Set the mode of guard zone.
OFF: Function OFF.
Display:
Show the zone that you set. The alarm does not sound.
In: When a target entered the set zone, the alarm sounds.
Out: When a target went out of the set zone, the alarm sounds.
AutoTT: Target tracking automatically.
5.25.3 MAKE ZONE
Make the guard zone.
The mode of the zo ne is “Display” While making zone.
104
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.26 WAYPOINT DISPLAY
When waypoint information is received from the navigation equipment, the waypoint mark appears on the radar display.
Set the display on/off.
① Press the MENU button to open the Main Menu.
② Select “Waypoint Display.”
When the function is turned on, the waypoint mark is displayed on the radar screen as red circle.
105
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.27 CHART
Set the display of chart.
To display the chart, need to insert chart card into SD card slot on the equipment beforehand.
② Select
“Chart.” ① Press the MENU button.
③ Select each menu.
Display
Palette
Type
Show extend Data
Symbol
5.27.1 TYPE
Select the kind of chart displayed from new pec or Navionics+.
106
5.27.2 DISPLAY
Select the chart display on/off.
5.27.3 SYMBOL
Select the chart symbol display on/off.
The symbols which can be selected the display on/off are in following list.
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Default Setting
Lat/Lon grid
Depth Grid
Symbol
Lighthouse
Buoy
Wreck Ship
Fish Haven
Sea Lane
Restricted Area
Fishing Area
Sea Cable
Name
Mark Attribute
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
On
On
On etc. (For example, Tide Station) Off
Display of depth grid depends on range scale setting, so it is thinned out.
To display all, set “Show extend Data (5.27.5).”
5.27.4 PALETTE
Set the display color of chart.
5.27.5 SHOW EXTEND DATA
Set to display of depth grid all regardless of range scale setting.
107
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.28 SET CHART OPERATION
Select the operation of “Delete Chart/Echo Temporarily” in “Set Operation.”
To perform this setting operation, the chart card is required.
① Press the MENU button.
② Select “Set Chart Operation.”
③ Select each menu.
Set Operation menu
Screen display while
“Delete Chart Temporarily”
Screen display while
“Delete Echo Temporarily”
Delete While Pressing: Chart or radar echo image is disappeared while pressing the user key.
When select the mode, press the cross key (right) to use this function.
Press once, delete mutual: Chart and radar echo image are disappeared mutually.
Perfor ming “Delete Chart Temporarily” while select the mode, chart is disappeared for 3 seconds. Radar echo image is also disappeared for 3 seconds after chart is displayed again. After that, both chart and radar echo are displayed.
108
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Perfor ming “Delete Echo Temporarily” while select the mode, Radar echo image is disappeared for 3 seconds. Chart is also disappeared for 3 seconds after radar echo image is displayed again. After that, both chart and radar echo are displayed.
Press 1 time, recover 8 seconds later: Performing “Delete Chart Temporarily” while select the mode, chart is disappeared for 8 seconds and displayed again.
Performing “Delete Echo Temporarily” while select the mode, radar echo image is disappeared for 8 seconds and displayed again.
5.29 MARK SETTING
Set the size, color and type for marks (about the mark function, see “5.9 MARK”).
Only marks of a specific color or type can be displayed.
① Press the MENU button.
② Select
“Mark.”
If
“Mark List” is selected, the list of marks is open.
See 5.29.6
③ Select each menu.
Mark Size Mark Color
Mark Type
Display Mark Color/Type
(This image is Display Mark Type)
5.29.1 MARK SIZE
Select the size of mark.
To
5.29.4
5.29.5
109
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.29.2 MARK COLOR
Select the color of mark.
The color of mark can be selected from following 7 colors.
White/Cyan/Blue/Green/Yellow/Pink/Red
5.29.3 MARK TYPE
Select the type of mark.
The type of mark can be selected from × , + , Y or .
5.29.4 DISPLAY MARK COLOR
Display the marks with the specified color.
When “All” is set to All, the setting of “All” is prior to individual settings.
When “All” is set to Individual, individual settings are prior to the setting of “All.”
5.29.5 DISPLAY MARK TYPE
Display the marks with the specified type.
When “All” is set to All, the setting of “All” is prior to individual settings.
When “All” is set to Individual, individual settings are prior to the setting of “All.”
5.29.6 MARK LIST
110
Display the list of marks which are on the radar screen.
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
■ The mark can be created or modified by operating on the list.
Procedure for creating new mark
1. Press the GAIN control.
2. The dialog as below is displayed.
3. Input the No.2 to No.5 items.
4. Select No.6 “Enter”, the mark can be created.
Procedure for modifying a mark
1. Press the cross key (up/down) or turn the MULTI control, move the focus on the mark to be modified.
2. Press the SEA control.
3. The dialog as below is displayed.
4. Input the No.2 to No.5 items.
5. Select No.6 “Enter”, the mark can be modified.
■ The marks can be deleted by operating on the list.
Procedure for individual deletion
1. Press the cross key (up/down) or turn the MULTI control to move the focus.
2. Press the RAIN control.
3. The selected mark is deleted.
All the marks can be deleted at once.
Procedure for deleting all
1. Press the BRILL control.
2. The following delete confirmation is displayed.
Select YES to delete.
3. All the marks are deleted.
111
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.30 OWNSHIP MARK SETTING
Set the size, colors and types for ownship marks (about the ownship mark function, see “5.11 OWNSHIP
MARK ”).
Only ownship marks of a specific color or type can be displayed.
① Press the MENU button. ② Select “Ownship Mark.”
③ Select each menu.
Own Ship Position
Mark Size
Display Mark Type
Own Ship Position
Mark Color
Own Ship Position
Mark Type
Display Mark Color
Own Ship Position
Mark List
5.30.1 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK SIZE
Select the size of mark.
112
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.30.2 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK COLOR
Select the color of mark.
The color of mark can be selected from following 7 colors.
White/Cyan/Blue/Green/Yellow/Pink/Red
5.30.3 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK TYPE
Select the type of mark.
The type of mark can be selected from × , + , Y or .
5.30.4 DISPLAY MARK COLOR
Display the marks with the specified color.
When “All” is set to All, the setting of “All” is prior to individual settings.
When “All” is set to Individual, individual settings are prior to the setting of “All.”
5.30.5 DISPLAY MARK TYPE
Display the marks with the specified type.
When “All” is set to All, the setting of “All” is prior to individual settings.
When “All” is set to Individual, individual settings are prior to the setting of “All.”
5.30.6 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK LIST
Display the list of the ownship marks which are on the radar screen.
113
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
■ The ownship mark can be created or modified by operating on the list.
Procedure for creating new mark
1. Press the GAIN control.
2. The dialog as below is displayed.
3. Input the No.2 to No.5 items.
4. Select No.6 “Enter”, the ownship mark can be created.
Procedure for modifying a mark
1. Press the cross key (up/down) or turn the MULTI control, move the focus on the mark to be modified.
2. Press the SEA control.
3. The dialog as below is displayed.
4. Input the No.2 to No.5 items.
5. Select No.6 “Enter”, the ownship mark can be modified.
■ The ownship marks can be deleted by operating on the list.
Procedure for individual deletion
1. Press the cross key (up/down) or turn the MULTI control to move the focus.
2. Press the RAIN control.
3. The selected ownship mark is deleted.
All the ownship marks can be deleted at once.
Procedure for deleting all
1. Press the BRILL control.
2. The following delete confirmation is displayed.
Select YES to delete.
3. All the ownship marks are deleted.
114
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.31 LINE SETTING
Set the colors and types for lines (about the line function, see “5.10 LINE”).
Only lines of a specific color or type can be displayed.
① Press the MENU button.
② Select
“Line”.
③ Select each menu.
Line Color Line Type
Display Line Color Display Line Type
5.31.1 LINE COLOR
Select the color of line.
The color of line can be selected from following 7 colors.
White/Cyan/Blue/Green/Yellow/Pink/Red
5.31.2 LINE TYPE
Line List
Select the type of line.
The type of line can be selected from Solid Line, Dashed Line (Short) or Dashed line (Long.)
115
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.31.3 DISPLAY LINE COLOR
Display the lines with the specified color.
When “All” is set to All, the setting of “All” is prior to individual settings.
When “All” is set to Individual, individual settings are prior to the setting of “All.”
5.31.4 DISPLAY LINE TYPE
Display the lines with the specified type.
When “All” is set to All, the setting of “All” is prior to individual settings.
When “All” is set to Individual, individual settings are prior to the setting of “All.”
5.31.5 LINE LIST
Display the list of lines which are on the radar screen.
■ The line vertex can be created or modified by operating on the list.
Procedure for creating new line vertex
1. Press the GAIN control.
2. The dialog as below is displayed.
116
3. Input the No.2 to No.5 items.
4. Select No.6 “Enter”, the vertex can be created.
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Procedure for modifying a line vertex
1. Press the cross key (up/down) or turn the MULTI control, move the focus on the vertex to be modified.
2. Press the SEA control.
3. The dialog as below is displayed.
4. Input the No.2 to No.5 items.
5. Select No.6 “Enter”, the vertex can be modified.
■ The lines can be deleted by operating on the list.
Procedure for individual deletion
1. Press the cross key (up/down) or turn the MULTI control to move the focus.
2. Press the RAIN control.
3. The selected line vertex is deleted.
All the lines can be deleted at once.
Procedure for deleting all
1. Press the BRILL control.
2. The following delete confirmation is displayed.
Select YES to delete.
3. All the lines are deleted.
117
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.32 OWN TRACK SETTING
① Press the MENU button.
Own Track Record On/Off
Own Track Interval
② Select
“Own Track”.
③ Select each menu.
Own Track Record
Display On/Off
Display Own Track Color
Own Track Color
Display Own Track Type
5.32.1 OWN TRACK RECORD ON/OFF
Turn on/off own track record function.
When this function is turned off, recording own track is stopped.
Own Track Type
Clear Own Track
Color/Type
5.32.2 OWN TRACK RECORD DISPLAY ON/OFF
Display own track on/off.
When this function is turned on, own track display depends on settings of “Display Own Track Color” and ”Display Own Track Type.”
118
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Own track is recorded while this function is turned off.
5.32.3 OWN TRACK COLOR
Select the color of own track line.
Own track line color can be selected from following 7 colors.
White/Cyan/Blue/Green/Yellow/Pink/Red
5.32.4 OWN TRACK TYPE
Select the type of own track line.
Own track line type can be selected from Solid Line, Dashed Line (Short) or Dashed line (Long).
5.32.5 OWN TRACK INTERVAL
The storage interval of the own ship's track is changed.
A preset time interval or preset distance interval can be selected as the storage interval. The distance setting varies depending on the range scale unit setting.
5.32.6 DISPLAY OWN TRACK COLOR
Display the line of own ship ’s track with the specified color.
When “All” is set to All, the setting of “All” is prior to individual settings.
When “All” is set to Individual, individual settings are prior to the setting of “All.”
5.32.7 DISPLAY OWN TRACK TYPE
Display the line of own ship ’s track with the specified type.
When “All” is set to All, the setting of “All” is prior to individual settings.
When “All” is set to Individual, individual settings are prior to the setting of “All.”
5.32.8 CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR/TYPE
Clear the line of own ship ’s track.
Select color and type to clear in “Clear Own Track Color” and “Clear Own Track Type.”
Execute “Clear Own Track”, the own ship’s track lines with the color and type that are set in “Clear Own Track
Color/Type” are deleted.
For example, when you select Red in “Clear Own Track Color” and All in “Clear Own Track Type”, red lines are deleted regardless of type by “Clear Own Track” execution.
119
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.33 FILE OPERATION
Marks, lines and own tracks stored in the equipment can be output via USB terminal.
① Press the MENU button. ② Select
“File Operation”.
③ Select each menu.
Save Load Delete
5.33.1 SAVE
Marks, lines and own tracks stored in the equipment can be output via USB terminal.
This operation can be worked while USB memory is inserted into the equipment.
5.33.2 LOAD
Load marks, lines and own tracks from USB.
Loading the data, stored data is overwritten.
120
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.33.3 DELETE
Delete marks, lines and own tracks via USB.
5.34 SCREEN CAPTURE
This equipment has the screen capture function.
This function is worked only while USB memory is inserted to USB port.
The captured images are saved to “JMA-3400\CAPTURE” folder in the USB memory.
① Press the MENU button. ② Select
“Screen Capture”.
③ Select each menu.
Capture function Set Manual Key
Interval
121
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.34.1 CAPTURE FUNCTION
Select the mode of capture function.
Off: Turn off the function.
Manual: When this mode is set, you can capture screen image by pressing User key assigned the function.
Assignment of the function can be set on “Set Manual Key.”
Auto: When this mode is set, screen image is captured automatically.
The interval of screen capture can be set “Interval.”
There is a capture icon at the bottom right of the screen.
Select “Manual”, the capture icon turn to . Select “Auto”, the icon turn to .
While capturing image, a part of the capture icon color turn like this image.
If screen capture is failed, the error message is displayed.
5.34.2 SET MANUAL KEY
Allocate the function to manually capture to the User key.
5.34.3 INTERVAL
Set the interval of screen capture automatically. Use the cross key or the MULTI control to change the value.
The interval can be set between 10 and 999 sec.
122
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.35 TIMED TX
This function reduces power consumption. When using timed TX function, the operation state is repeatedly changed between TX and standby state.
The rotating of antenna does not stop during the Non-TX.
① Press the MENU button. ② Select “Timed TX”.
③ Select each menu.
Timed TX
TX Time Standby Time
5.35.1 TIMED TX
Turn on/off the timed TX function.
The timed TX function can be turned off only in TX state. It cannot be turned off in standby state.
5.35.2 TX TIME
Set the number of antenna rotation. Use the cross key or the MULTI control to change the value.
TX time can be adjusted between 1 and 99 Scan.
123
Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
5.35.3 STANDBY TIME
Set the time for standby state. Use the cross key or the MULTI control to change the value.
The standby time can be adjusted between 1 and 99 min.
Note:
If you execute function of the timed TX, please be careful.
Because if you forget to execute the timed TX, you will misunderstand that radar transmitting was stopped and radar echo disappeared in the transmitting. You must be remembered that you had set on function of
Timed TX. Please use timed TX with caution fully.
5.36 TLL TX "USER2"
When this function is turned on, TLL sentence is transmitted with pressing the User2 key.
Press the User2 key once, TLL sentence is transmitted once. If another function is allocated “User2 Short
Press ”, both the assigned function and TLL TX are performed by pressing the User2 key.
Select the target of TLL in “Target Information TX.”
For details of target information TX setting, see “7.6.6 TARGET INFORMATION TX.”
5.37 CERTIFICATION INFORMATION
Display the certification information.
124
Chapter 6 OPTION AND OTHER FUNCTIONS
Chapter 6 OPTION AND OTHER FUNCTIONS
6.1 NMEA CABLE
The JMA-3400 series has 4 channels NMEA0183 signal input and 1 channel NMEA2000 signal input allowing connecting to navigation equipment, such as GPS, for own position, waypoints and speed.
It also allows connecting a GPS compass for your heading and/or AIS for displaying targets.
In order to use the above function, NMEA cable (option) is required.
・ Using JRC GPS receiver, please connect NMEA4 (GPS port).
・ AIS connects all NMEA port available.
<NMEA0183>
The data are received by IEC61162-1/2.
Telecommunications standard NMEA0183 / IEC61162-1/2 is not conformity at all
Communications protocol 4800 bps, start 1bit, data 8bit, stop 1bit, With no parity
Input sentence NMEA0183: V1.5: GGA/ GLL/ RMC
V2.0: GGA/ GLL/ RMC/ ZDA
V2.3: GGA/ GLL/ RMC/ GNS/ ZDA
(Talker= "G P" etc.)
Information classification about a ship -- the time entry; -- GGA/ GNS/ GLL/ RMC
Day and time entry: ZDA
Time entry of equipment: ZDA/ GGA/ GNS/ GLL/ RMC
IEC61162-1 / 2 (considerable) Priority of data :
Lat/Lon: GGA>RMC>RMA>GNS>GLL
SOG/COG: RMC>RMA>VTG
Log speed: VBW>VHW
HEADING: THS>HDT>HDG>HDM>VHW
Bearing signal
IEC61162-1/2(considerable)
4800bps/38400bps:THS>HDT>HDG>HDM>VHW DEPTH: DPT>DBT
WATER TEMP: MTW
AIS:
WIND:
VDM,VDO,ALR
MWV>VWT,VWR
Speed signal
IEC61162 4800 bps :VBW, VHW
WAYPOINT: RMB>BWC>BWR
<NMEA2000>
For the NMEA2000 PGN supported by the JMA3400 series, see “12.7 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL.”
125
Chapter 6 OPTION AND OTHERFUNCTIONS
NMEA signal line connector wiring table
GPS
5
4
6
3
1
2
Name
GPS
4
5
6
Pin No. Signal
1 +12V
2
3
GND
GPS
I/O Color
Out
-
Red
Black
RXD - White
RXD+
TXD+
TXD -
Green
Yellow
Brown
NMEA0183
Name
NMEA0183
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
Pin No. Signal
1
2
NMEA1
I/O
RX+(A)
Color
Brown
RX - (B) Red
TX+(A)
TX - (B)
Orange
Yellow
NMEA2 RX+(A) Green
RX - (B) Blue
11
12
GND
Shield
TX+(A) Purple
TX - (B) Gray
-
-
White
Black
Pink
Sky Blue
126
Use the Brown, Red, Orange, Yellow,
Green, Blue, Purple, Gray and White cables alone.
[Pink] Unused
[Black]
[Sky Blue]
[Shield]
Connect [Black] and [Blue] cables and use them as shield wires.
Chapter 6 OPTION AND OTHER FUNCTIONS
NMEA ALARM
Name Pin No. Signal
NMEA_ALARM 1
2
NMEA3
I/O
RX+(A)
Color
Brown
RX - (B) Red
Use the Brown, Red, Orange, Yellow,
Green, Blue, Purple, Gray and White cables alone.
[Pink] Unused
[Black]
[Sky Blue]
[Shield]
Connect [Black] and [Blue] cables and use them as shield wires.
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
11
12
TX+(A) Orange
TX - (B) Yellow
EVENT +
-
ALARM COM
Green
Blue
Purple
Gray
GND
Shield
NO
-
-
White
Black
Pink
Sky Blue
127
Chapter 6 OPTION AND OTHERFUNCTIONS
6.2 EXTERNAL MONITOR OUTPUT
If you installed the External monitor output, waterproofing (IPX5) of rear side of display unit is no guaranteed.
Through the additional interface, you can lead out the video signal to an external monitor. Additional external port is using a DVI connector. External mon itor’s display pixels are 800x600 dots (SVGA). It is necessary that power supply to the external monitor separately. Since the output screen is a vertical screen, use a monitor that can hold the display vertically.
Loosen the screws (2 pcs.), and remove the cover.
Connect DVI cable.
External monitor mounting
6.3 RECTIFIER UNIT
The input voltage range is from DC +10.8V to DC +31.2V. (DC12-24V, -10%+30%).
The power consumption varies depending on the radar model name. Check the maximum power consumption described in the "12.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS."
If ship’s DC battery power supply is not enough to the operation of this radar, we strongly recommended that to you use following option rectifier unit.
Rectifier unit NBA-5111: For JMA-3404, JMA-3406/HS and JMA-3412-4/4HS/6/6HS
Rectifier unit NBD-865: For JMA-3404 and JMA-3406
128
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
An initial adjustment had been done for this radar at the factory. This product will be shipped in a usable state.
However, in the case you want to configure it with your favorite, please set it by referring to this chapter. It is recommended that you save to USB memory (see 8.5.6.1) or you keep a note of the setting by the user for return to the previous setting.
① Long press MENU button.
② Input 0 and press ENT.
③ Select
“Basic Adjustment.”
④ Select each setting item.
Bearing Adjustment
Range Adjustment
Tune Adjustment
Antenna Height
Language
129
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.1 LANGUAGE SELECTION
① Select
“Language.” ② Select preferred language.
In case of choosing non-understand language, it is able to return to the English menu to input “2256” at the code input menu. At that time, please reselect the language.
7.2 BEARING ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the bearing so that bearing of the target measured with the ship’s compass matches that of the target echo on the radar display.
Before adjustment
Measure the bearing of an adequate target (for example, a ship at anchor, a breakwater or a buoy) relative to own ship’s heading.
Procedure
(1) Radar is set to TX mode.
(2) Adjust GAIN, RAIN and SEA to find the known target on the screen.
(3) Adjust the bearing at the end point to display the target described in “Before adjustment” at the same direction as measured.
② MULTI control or cross key
③ Adjust the value so that
① Select “ Bearing Adjustment.
” change the value.
the known target is on the set EBL. known target known target
7.3 RANGE ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the range so that the range of the target on the radar video is indicated correctly. This set up is make the target RANGE coincident with the VRM readout data. Read out the target range by the VRM function.
The target has the same height with the radar scanner should be better.
130
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
Range unit is using the NM in marine radar usually. (1 NM = 1,852 m).
Before adjustment
Select a target which range is already known.
Procedure
(1) Radar is set to TX mode.
(2) Adjust GAIN, RAIN and SEA to find the known target on the screen.
(3) Adjust the range on the radar to match to the range of the target described in “Before adjustment.”
① Select
“Range Adjustment.”
② MULTI control or cross key change the value.
③ Adjust the value so that
the known target is on the set VRM.
①
Known target
Known target
7.4 TUNING ADJUSTMENT
The physical dimensions of the magnetron tube in the transmitter dictate the precise transmitter output frequency of the particular set.
The tuning function control fine-tunes the receiver circuits to match their maximum sensitivity to that transmitted signal. Tuning adjustment is necessary for maintaining a high performance.
But the tuning adjustment had been already set at the factory. This adjustment value should not be changed greatly when started up the radar at first.
① Select “ Tune Adjustment.
” ② MULTI control or cross key
③ Adjust the tuning adjustment bar change the value.
to more than 8 scales.
Tune Adjustment bar
131
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.5 ANTENNA HEIGHT SET UP
Set up the antenna height.
This set up is related to sea clutter rejection control.
At a short range, sea clutter level is proportion to the height of the scanner.
So an optimum sea clutter rejection constant must be selected according with the height of antenna.
① Select
“Antenna Height.” ② Select an appropriate antenna height.
132
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.6 COMMUNICATION PORT SETUP
Set up the communication port to communicate external device.
① Long press MENU button.
② Input 0 and press ENT.
④ Select each setting item.
Baud Rate
Rx Sentence
Rx Port
Tx Port
TX Data Format
Target Information TX
③ Select “COM Port Setting.”
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4
7.6.5
7.6.6
133
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.6.1 BAUD RATE
Data speed setting of communication.
Auto: Switching automatically between 4800bps and 38400bps.
① Select the GPS and NMEA port to be set.
② Select Baud Rate.
②
The same setting is possible for other ports .
7.6.2 RX SENTENCE
Select whether to receive each sentence. The default value is all On.
① Select the type of sentence to be set.
② Select the sentence to be set.
GPS (Lat/Lon)
GPS (COG/SOG)
Heading
Depth
Wind
WPT
③ Set sentence reception On/Off.
The same setting is possible for other sentence .
134
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.6.3 RX PORT
Choose the receive port of each signal. Set to automatic when there is no particular problem.
Auto: Switching automatically between NMEA2000, GPS, NMEA1, NMEA2, and NMEA3.
① Select each setting item.
② Select Rx Port.
Press cross key (down) or turn MULTI control to the right to display the next page.
7.6.4 TX PORT
Choose the transmit port of each signal.
① Select each setting item.
Press cross key (down) or turn MULTI control to the right to display the next page.
② Select Tx Port.
135
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.6.5 TX DATA FORMAT
It sets the NMEA format of the data to be transmitted from the transmission port.
Select each setting item. TX Interval
NMEA Version
NMEA Talker
7.6.6 TARGET INFORMATION TX
Set this menu to transmit from the NMEA port the information of the ship and target that was acquired by the
AIS and target tracking function (TT).
TX Target
Select each setting item.
TTM Distance Accuracy
TTM Average Mode
TTM Average Scan
136
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.7 I/F DEVICE
Make an appropriate setting for each type of equipment when inputting true bearing signals, true bearing data, and speed data.
Settings and parameters are different for each type of equipment.
Make settings for the type of equipment to be connected.
① Long press MENU button.
② Input 0 and press ENT.
③ Select “I/F Device.”
④ Select each setting item.
Heading Equipment
Manual Heading
Speed Equipment
Manual Speed
MAG Compass Setting
7.7.5
137
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.7.1 HEADING EQUIPMENT
Selects the input of the heading data of own ship. The heading data of own ship can be selected from the heading information of manual input, GYRO/Compass and GPS.
For automatic input, select an equipment which can receive the following sentences.
THS>HDT>HDG>HDM>VHW
For manual input, the heading information manually set in “7.7.2 MANUAL HEADING” can be used.
GYRO/Compass: Input the heading data of own ship from GYRO interface, GPS compass or electronic compass
GPS: Input the heading data of own ship from GPS receiver.
7.7.2 MANUAL HEADING
When 7.7.1(HEADING EQUIPMENT) is selected manual, please input heading direction value. Some functions that require heading information by the manual setting value set will be operational, but please do never forget that it is running in head up always.
7.7.3 SPEED EQUIPMENT
Selects the input of the speed data of own ship.
GPS: Input the speed data of own ship from GPS receiver.
Log/2axis Log: Input the speed through water data of own ship from Log (1-axis log) or 2Log (2-axis log).
For manual input, the speed information manually set in “7.7.4 MANUAL SPEED” can be used.
7.7.4 MANUAL SPEED
When 7.7.3 (SPEED EQUIPMENT) is selected manual, please input speed value. Manual setting value is used in the processing of internal. The value that affects the relative length of radar trail and vector. Please do not use it in the actual operation.
7.7.5 MAGNETIC COMPASS
Select each setting item.
When this setting is ON, the magnetic compass value can be corrected.
Set to OFF when no correction is performed.
138
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.8 JRC GPS
This setting is available only JRC GPS receivers directly connected to the connector for which “GPS” is engraved at the rear of the cabinet.
① Long press MENU button.
② Input 0 and press ENT.
③ Select “GPS.”
④ Select each setting item.
7.8.6
NMEA Version
GPS Setting
Beacon Setting
SBAS Setting
7.8.2
LORAN Setting
Display GPS reception status
139
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.8.1 NMEA VERSION
Set the NMEA version of output GPS sentence. When the “Auto” mode is selected, NMEA version of the connected equipment is automatically detected.
140
7.8.2 GPS SETTING
Fix Mode
Elevate Mask
HDOP
Smooth Lat/Lon
Smooth SOG
Smooth COG
Press cross key (down) or turn
MULTI control to the right to display the next page.
Select each setting item.
Correction Method Smoothing1
Smoothing2
RAIM Accuracy Level
Exclusion Satellite
GPS Send Data
GPS Adjust
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.8.2.11
7.8.2.13
141
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.8.2.1 CORRECTION METHOD
Set the correction method. When SBAS is selected, the GPS receiver must be compatible with SBAS.
GPS Single: Fix a position only with single GPS. Does not perform fixing with SBAS or beacon.
SBAS: Fix a position with SBAS or single GPS. Does not perform fixing with beacon.
Beacon: Fix a position with beacon or single GPS. Does not perform fixing with SBAS.
AUTO: The optimum setting is selected from single GPS, SBAS and beacon.
7.8.2.2 FIX MODE
Set the GPS fix mode.
2D: 2D positioning can be done with height acquired.
3D: 3D positioning can be done with height acquired.
AUTO: 2D positioning and 3D positioning can automatically be selected with optimum.
7.8.2.3 ELEVATE MASK
Limit the satellite to be used with elevation angle.
7.8.2.4 HDOP
Set the HDOP level of the GPS receiver.
The smaller the value, the higher the accuracy although fixing a position becomes difficult.
7.8.2.5 SMOOTHING LAT/LON
Smoothing can be applied to measured positions. The higher the smoothing value, the smoother the results will be, but the greater the time lag. Conversely, if the smoothing value is set low, a great number of changes will occur, but there will be little time lag. As such, it is important to choose the optimal value for own usage situation.
7.8.2.6 SMOOTHING SOG
Smoothing can be applied to measured speeds. The higher the smoothing value, the smoother the results will be, but the greater the time lag. Conversely, if the smoothing value is set low, a great number of changes will occur, but there will be little time lag. As such, it is important to choose the optimal value for own usage situation.
7.8.2.7 SMOOTHING COG
Smoothing can be applied to measured courses. The higher the smoothing value, the smoother the results will be, but the greater the time lag. Conversely, if the smoothing value is set low, a great number of changes will occur, but there will be little time lag. As such, it is important to choose the optimal value for own usage situation.
7.8.2.8 SMOOTHING1
This setting is corresponding to relatively new JRC GPS model.
Note: The smoothing setting range is depending on the JRC GPS software version.
0 to 99 sec (R29.04~R33.99)
1 to 99 sec (R26.01~R29.03)
142
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
Smoothing function can be applied to measured positions, speeds and courses.
However, if the set value of the smoothing is too high, it is possible to obtain a smooth result, but a large time lag is generated at the same time.
Conversely, if the set value of the smoothing is too low, many changes will be generated, but the time lag will be reduced considerably. Thus, it is important to choose an optimal value for own usage function.
7.8.2.9 SMOOTHING2
This setting is corresponding to relatively old JRC GPS model.
Note: The smoothing setting range is as below.
0/10/40 sec
Smoothing function can be applied to measured positions, speeds and courses. However, if the set value of the smoothing is too high, it is possible to obtain a smooth result, but a large time lag is generated at the same time.
Conversely, if the set value of the smoothing is too low, many changes will be generated, but the time lag will be reduced considerably. Thus, it is important to choose an optimal value for own usage situation.
7.8.2.10 RAIM ACCURACY LEVEL
Set the RAIM accuracy level to be used. RAIM is the function that the receiver judges whether the accuracy of GPS position information meets the conditions or not. The higher the accuracy level is, the wider the judgment range is. When off is selected, RAIM accuracy level function is stopped and the judgment cannot be performed. For single GPS, set to 30m or more.
7.8.2.11 EXCLUSION SATELLITE
It uses the GPS satellites to get position information. But in this setting it sets for a satellite to disable.
Please set when the failed GPS satellite was found.
② Change the value.
① Select each setting item. Exclusion Satellite 1~6 can be set in the same way
7.8.2.12 GPS SETTING SEND DATA
Send GPS setting Data to the GPS receiver.
① Use the cross key or
MULTI control to set a value between 0 and 32.
143
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.8.2.13 GPS ADJUST
Select each setting item.
Position
Enter latitude and longitude.
Antenna Height
Set the height of the antenna.
Time
Enter the current time in UTC.
Date
Enter the Date in UTC.
GPS Adjust Master Reset
GPS Adjust Send Data
144
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.8.3 BEACON SETTING
Set for a JRC Beacon (DGPS receiver). This setting is available only for JRC Beacon receiver (DGPS receiver).
AUTO: Select an optimum beacon station automatically.
Manual: The beacon frequency and baud rate needs to be set manually.
Note: This setting is enabled when “Station Select” is set to ”Manual.”
Select each setting item. Select
Automatic/manual selection of stations.
Frequency
Set “beacon frequency.”
Baud Rate
Selection of beacon bit rate.
Send Data
145
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.8.4 SBAS SETTING
AUTO: Automatically selects the SBAS satellite number.
Manual: Manually enter the SBAS satellite number.
Note: This setting is enabled when “Station Select” is set to ”Manual.”
Select each setting item.
Satellite Search
Select satellite search mode.
Type0 Information
Select type0 information.
Ranging
Select ranging.
SBAS Satellite Number
Select SBAS satellite number.
Send Data
Sends the SBAS set value.
146
Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
7.8.5 GPS STATUS DISPLAY
Display the reception status of the GPS receivers ( GPS, DGPS and WAAS receivers) currently connected.
This setting is available only for JRC GPS/DGPS/WAAS receiver directly connected to the connector for which “GPS” is engraved at the cabinet. This function cannot indicate with transmission state.
7.8.6 LORAN SETTING
Set up LORAN.
Select each setting item. Display Time Zone
Set the time difference display.
LORAN A
Set LORAN A.
LORAN C
Set LORAN C.
147
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
8.1 RADAR ECHO
148
This setting, are items that greatly affects the radar image. When you want to change, please change while observing the radar image carefully.
① Long press the MENU button.
② Input "0" and press ENT button. ③ Select "RADAR Echo."
Noise Level
④ Select each setting item.
Main Bang Suppression
* Press the cross key or
turn the MULTI control
to set the value.
8.1.2
Target Enhance Level
Gain
Sea
Rain
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
8.1.1 NOISE LEVEL
Adjust the noise level.
The noise level is adjusted at the factory. When adjusting the noise level after installation, perform only fine-tuning within ±5.
8.1.2 MAIN BANG SUPPRESSION
Main Bang Suppression is adjusted to suppress main bang, a reflection signal from 3D circuit including wave guide tube, that generally appears as a circular image focusing on the center of the radar display.
Optimum adjustment allows main bang image to remain lightly on the display.
If the main bang is not so big, use the default setting at factory.
Before adjustment:
1.Set the range to 0.125NM.
2.Set the radar video enhance function.
3.Set the radar video process function.
4.Turn the [GAIN] control to the maximum position.
5.Turn the [RAIN] control to the minimum position.
6.Turn the [SEA] control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be judged.
Do not change suppression level/area unless absolutely necessary.
Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby target images and thus collisions may occur resulting in accidents.
Select each setting item.
Main Bang Suppression Area
Main Bang Suppression Level
Main Bang Suppression Slope
※ Enter values with the cross key or MULTI control.
149
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.1.3 TARGET ENHANCE LEVEL
Sets the level of target enhancement.
Target enhance level can be set from level1 to level4.If the level is set too high, the range resolution may be declined. So it is necessary to set a value properly.
8.1.4 GAIN
Adjust the minimum sensitivity level of the [GAIN] control.
Do not change this adjusted level carelessly.
The value is usually set to 0 and should not be changed unless there is problem.
Before performing this adjustment, perform the operation described in “NOISE LEVEL.”
If sensitivity is set too high, unnecessary signals such as noises in the receiver and false echoes increase to lower target visibility. At the same time, if sensitivity is set too low, detection of targets such as ships and dangerous objects may be hindered. Therefore, sensitivity must always be set to an optimal level.
8.1.5 SEA
Set the STC Curve. User selects the "river" or "sea" of the curve selection. Please do not change the STC offset and slope correction. If the value changed, affects sea clutter suppression function drastically.
When using the sea clutter suppression function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the sea surface at close range. Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited. When using the sea clutter suppression function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level.
150
Select each setting item.
STC Curve Select
STC Slope Correction
STC Offset
* Press the cross key or
turn the MULTI control
to set the value.
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
8.1.6 RAIN
Set the FTC Curve. User selects the "river" or "sea" of the curve selection. Please do not change the FTC offset and slope correction. If the value changed, affects rain clutter suppression function drastically.
When using the rain clutter suppression function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the sea surface at close range. Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited. When using the sea clutter suppression function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level.
Select each setting item.
FTC Curve Select
FTC Slope Correction
FTC Offset
* Press the cross key or
turn the MULTI control
to set the value.
151
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.2 TRAILS
Set the radar trails setting.
① Long press the MENU button.
④ Select each setting item.
② Input "0" and press ENT button.
Trails Suppression Distance
Max Interval
Range Limit
③ Select "Trails."
* Press the cross key or
turn the MULTI control
to set the value.
8.2.1 TRAILS SUPPRESSION DISTANCE
Set the suppression distance of trails.
Trail of target that is closer from own ship than the value of this function setting is not created.
152
8.2.2 MAX INTERVAL
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
Set the group of trails. Selected group is displayed in the main menu.
Use Short if you use short radar tracks a lot, such as in the bay.
Use Super Long if you need a long radar track, such as in open sea voyages.
Middle is an intermediate specification between Short and Long. In addition, continuous track can be used for all set values.
Short: OFF/15sec/30sec/1min/2min/3min/4min/5min/6min/10min/15min/Continuous
Middle: OFF/30sec/1min/2min/3min/4min/5min/6min/10min/15min/30min/Continuous
Long: OFF/1min/2min/3min/4min/5min/6min/10min/15min/30min/1hour/Continuous
Super Long: OFF/30min/1hour/2hour/3hour/4hour/5hour/6hour/10hour/12hour/24hour/Continuous
8.2.3 RANGE LIMIT
Set the range to take over trails.
153
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.3 TT
Do not change the quantization level settings unless absolutely necessary.
If set at an inappropriate value, the acquisition or tracking function of the target tracking function (TT) deteriorates, and this may lead to accidents.
① Long press the MENU button.
③ Input "0" and press ENT button. ② Select "TT."
④ Select each setting item.
Vector Constant
Gate Display
Gate Size
* Press the cross key or turn the
MULTI control to set the value in
" Vector Constant " and " Gate
Size.
"
Vector Constant: Vector shows the movement of the target. When Vector Constant is large, vector is stable, but the response is slow. When Vector Constant is small, vector is unstable, but the response is quick.
Gate Size: Set up the region size which can search the movement target automatically. When region is wide, possible to track fast moving target, but many clutters are include. Sometime do miss tracking because of much noise. When region is narrow, possible to track stable, but fast moving targets are tend to lost. Because of fast target soon goes outside of the region.
Gate Display: Set the display on/off of target detection area (gate) for target trail function.
Note:
The TT function requires own ship’s heading and GPS signal (COG/SOG) information . If there are not these information, TT function does not function correctly.
154
8.4 SCANNER
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
8.4.4
① Long press the MENU button. ② Input "0" and press ENT button.
④ Select each setting item.
Press the cross key
(down) or turn the MULTI control to move to the next page.
Slope Correction
Scanner Rotation Speed
Tune Peak Adjustment
turn the
③ Select "Scanner."
Pulse Repetition Frequency Fine Tuning
(PRF Fine Tuning)
Stagger Trigger
Tune indicator Level Adjustment
* Press the cross key or
PRF Output Mode
MULTI control
to set the value.
Safety Switch
Stop antenna in the specified direction
Ice Class Standby Mode
155
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.4.1 SLOPE CORRECTION
The dynamic range of scanner receiver is different.
Therefore, adjust the characteristics with this function.
8.4.2 PULSE REPETITION FREQUENCY FINE TUNING (PRF
FINE TUNING)
If radar’s interference patterns are concentrically displayed, increment or decrement the set value by 3 to 4 in order to heighten the effect of interference rejection.
PRF Fine Tuning:
Fine-tune the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter in the range 90% to 100%.
This setting cannot be performed simultaneously with the setting of “STAGGER TRIGGER.”
8.4.3 STAGGER TRIGGER
Turn on/off the interference reduction function controlled by the transmission repetition frequency control of the transmitter.
This function is effective when radar interference does not go away.
This setting cannot be performed simultaneously with the setting of “PRF FINE TUNING.”
8.4.4 SCANNER ROTATION SPEED
Set the scanner rotation speed for each pulse width. The radar sensitivity is higher when antenna is rotating in low speed.
Short range operation requires a high speed antenna rotation to refresh the screen as soon as possible.
Long range operation requires a low speed antenna rotation to maintain a high sensitivity.
You can select a rotational speed according to your request.
Note:
The following setting values of the rotation speed are the setting values for the motor, and the actual rotation speed of the antenna will cause a slight error toward the setting value.
In addition, this value is a guide when there is no wind, and errors may occur depending on the wind direction and wind speed.
・ JMA-3406, JMA-3411-4, JMA-3411-6
0=27.0rpm, 1=25.4rpm, 2=23.8rpm, 3=22.2rpm, 4=20.6rpm, 5=19.0rpm, 6=17.4rpm, 7=16.0rpm
・ JMA-3404, JMA-3406HS, JMA-3411-4HS, JMA-3411-6HS
0=48rpm, 1=42rpm, 2=36rpm, 3=30rpm, 4=27rpm, 5=24rpm, 6=20rpm, 7=16rpm
8.4.5 PRF OUTPUT MODE
Select the operation mode of the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter.
Normal: Default setting is Normal. Both appropriate sensitivity and magnetron life expectancy are considered.
Economy: Sensitivity slightly lowers, but the service life of magnetron is prolonged when short pulses are used.
High Power: Sensitivity improves when long pulse are used, but the service life of magnetron is slightly
shortened.
156
8.4.6 SAFETY SWITCH
Set the status of safety switch.
You can select the status from the following items.
TX-Off/Standby/TX-On/Ignore Error
8.4.7 TUNE PEAK ADJUSTMENT
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
Don’t adjust the tune peak adjustment value unless the serviceman. This value is already setting in the factory. If change this value in unnecessary,
Auto Tune function will be influenced, and radar echo will become weak at
Auto Tune, and this may lead to accidents.
Please make adjustments tuning indicator bar to be swing largest at the tuning position of the maximum sensitivity. This adjustment must be done with (8.4.8 Tuning indicator) alternately.
Set the range to 48NM.
Note:
Always to be set the tune-peak-adjustment value of near the 64 at the factory.
When the equipment is used for a long time and automatic tuning function no longer works properly, adjusting the tune peak adjustment value may result in improvement of the automatic tuning function.
It should be noted that an optimal adjustment value is required for proper operation of the automatic tuning function.
8.4.8 TUNE INDICATOR LEVEL
Don’t adjust the tune indicator level value to 100% tune bar. This value is already setting in the factory. If change this value in unnecessary, Auto Tune function will be influenced, and radar echo will become weak at Auto Tune, and this may lead to accidents.
If the tuning level is too low, then you need to adjust the tune indicator level.
Set the range to 48NM.
Note:
Do not let the tune indicator bar reach 100% while adjusting the tune level.
The automatic tuning function may not perform properly if the bar reaches 100%.
Set the level such that the tune indicator bar always reads 80% to 90%.
8.4.9 STOP ANTENNA IN THE SPECIFIED DIRECTION
Stop antenna in the specified direction when switching from TX mode to STBY mode.
Select " ON/OFF ", and turn the function on/off.
Select " Angle " , and specify the direction of stopping antenna.
It will be the relative direction from your ship, so please measure and adjust the direction with EBL.
157
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.4.10 ICE CLASS STANDBY MODE
In this mode, the scanner is rotated when transmission is in the standby state.
This mode is effective to prevent the antenna's rotating shaft from freezing.
8.5 CONTROL
You can adjust the function button and control.
① Long press the MENU button.
② Input "0" and press ENT button.
④ Select each setting item.
Multi Control Menu Time Out
Cross Key Gain
* Press the cross key or
turn the MULTI control to set the value.
Trackball Control
③ Select "Control."
Multi Control
Gain Control/
Sea Control/
Rain Control
(This image is Gain Control menu)
* Sea Control/Rain
Control menu are the same as Gain control.
8.5.1 MULTI CONTROL MENU TIME OUT
If no operation is made after the MULTI control menu is displayed, the menu display can be turned off after the specified time has elapsed.
If 0 second is set, the menu display will not be turned off in no operation.
158
8.5.2 CROSS KEY GAIN
Set the cursor acceleration when the cross key is pressed and held.
The larger the value is, the faster the acceleration is, or vice versa.
8.5.3 MULTI CONTROL
Set the cursor movement amount when MULTI control is operated.
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
The larger the value is, the greater the amount of movement is, or vice versa.
EBL: Set the amount of movement when turning the dial to set EBL.
VRM: Set the amount of movement when turning the dial to set VRM.
Common: Set the amount of movement when turning the dial except set EBL/VRM.
8.5.4 GAIN CONTROL/SEA CONTROL/RAIN CONTROL
Set the settings of GAIN/SEA/RAIN control.
Select " Response Level " , and set the response level. If you set a large value, the amount of movement will also increase.
Select " Min Preset " , and set the gain when turning the control to minimum position.
Select " Max Preset " , and set the gain when turning the control to maximum position.
159
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.6 BUZZER
160
You can adjust the buzzer volume.
① Long press the MENU button. ② Input "0" and press ENT button.
④ Select each setting item.
Setting the buzzer volume
It sets the buzzer volume.
The
Note
“0” is muted.
:
If set to "0", you may be delay that realize the danger of the capability. And you may be mistaken not to run functions.
Please set by considering enough.
Select each setting item.
External
Turn on/off the buzzer in " External "
③ Select "Buzzer."
* Press the cross key or
turn the MULTI control
to set the value.
.
8.7 MAINTENANCE
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
Performs maintenance.
① Long press the MENU button.
② Input "0" and press ENT button.
Reset All
④ Select each setting item.
Reset Partial
System Time Clear
USB Format
③ Select "Maintenance."
Scanner Time Clear
Table Update
Internal Setting
161
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.7.1 RESET PARTIAL
If you press YES, the operation will be executed immediately.
When executed, the display unit will automatically restart.
The partial reset is the function to read out table update value (see 8.7.5).
Reference:
Initialization function of the reset partial is the function to read out table update value (see 8.7.5).
Items which can be reset.
RADAR Echo: Initialize the RADAR Echo settings in the
Main Menu and the Initial Setting Menu.
Function Setting: Initialize the Function Settings.
Basic Adjustment: Initialize the Basic adjustment settings in the Adjust Menu.
Main Menu: Initialize the settings of the Main Menu,
MULTI control menu, soft key menu and radar screen settings (except RADAR Echo and Function Setting).
Adjust Menu: Initialize the settings of Adjust Menu
(except RADAR Echo and Basic Adjustment).
System Information 1: Initialize the Utility Menu.
System Information 2: Initialize the Engineer Menu.
All Menu: Initialize all settings (except marks, lines and own ship ’s track data).
Select each setting item.
Display the dialogue.
If you press YES, the operation will be executed.
* The same dialogue is
shown about each menu.
162
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
8.7.2 RESET ALL
If system operation is unstable, it may be stabilized by initialized the memory area. To initialize the memory area, the all settings become to the factory inspection settings. It is recommended that you save to USB storage internal settings before to run the “reset all.” (see 8.7.6.1)
If you press YES, the operation will be executed immediately.
When executed, the display unit will automatically restart.
Note that performing “Reset All” erases data, such as marks/lines.
“Reset All” make to initialize the memory area, the all settings become to the factory inspection settings.
8.7.3 SYSTEM TIME CLEAR
If you press YES, the operation will be executed immediately.
The operating time of the display unit can be initialized.
163
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.7.4 SCANNER TIME CLEAR
* The same dialogue is
shown about each menu.
Save the following scanner time data stored in the scanner into the display unit.
Scanner Transmit Time
Motor Rotating Time
When replacing the scanner internal control circuit, perform the procedure below to inherit scanner time data.
1. Save the scanner time data.
2. Replace the scanner internal control circuit.
3. Restore the scanner time data.
Restore the scanner time data stored in the display unit into the scanner internal control circuit.
Initialize those operating time above when magnetron or scanner motor is replaced.
8.7.5 TABLE UPDATE
The following data can be uploaded.
・ STC Curve
・ Color
・ Initial Value
・ Insert Language
・ Echo Simulation
It is recommended that, when you installed the radar and the radar adjustment has been completed, run the table update by selecting of the all menu in initial value of this item. It becomes possible to restore the settings at the time of the update table by the reset partial function (see 8.5.1).
164
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
Select each setting item. If you select
"STC Curve", "Color",
"Insert Language" and
"Echo Simulation".
If you select "Initial Value".
Initial Value
* The same dialogue is
shown about each menu.
Select each setting item.
8.7.6 INTERNAL SETTING
You can store in the internal settings to the USB memory by using the USB port or read out the internal settings from USB memory.
Select each setting item.
* "USB to Internal Memory ” menu are
the same as "Internal Memory to USB ”.
* The same dialogue is
shown about each menu.
165
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.7.6.1 INTERNAL MEMORY TO USB
It may take long time to access USB flash memory during transmission.
We recommend that you use USB flash memory during stand-by.
You can copy the system settings which were saved in the internal memory (such as various item settings of menus, etc.) to a USB flash memory. To copy the settings which were saved in the internal memory, a
USB flash memory must be inserted into "USB" port on the control panel beforehand. When you replaced the processing circuit inside the display unit, you can restore the system by load the data stored in the USB flash memory and write it to the system memory.
It should be saved to USB flash memory when the system settings are completed. And we strongly recommend that you save the operating conditions to a USB flash memory on a regular basis.
Items which can be saved to a USB flash memory are following.
RADAR Echo: RADAR Echo settings in Main Menu and Adjust Setting to the USB. will be saved
Function Setting:
Basic Adjustment:
Main Menu:
Function Setting settings will be saved to the USB.
Basic Adjustment settings will be saved to the USB.
Main Menu, MULTI control menu, and radar screen settings (except
RADAR Echo and Function Setting settings) will be saved to the USB.
Adjust Setting:
System Information 1:
System Information 2:
All Menu:
Adjust Setting Menu (except RADAR Echo and Basic Adjustment settings) will be saved to the USB.
Utility Menu will be saved to the USB.
Engineer Menu will be saved to the USB.
Internal all settings will be saved to the USB .
Note:
When the USB flash memory is inserted, the dedicated folder to save / read the internal value will be created. However, as the capacity of the USB flash memory is large, it takes time to create the dedicated folder.
8.7.6.2 USB TO INTERNAL MEMORY
When executed, the display unit will automatically restart.
Load the data stored in the USB flash memory and write it to the system internal memory.
Through this operation, you can return the system to the previous operation condition after replaced the processing circuit.
166
8.7.7 USB FORMAT
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
It may take long time to access USB flash memory during transmission.
We recommend that you use USB flash memory during standby.
・ During formatting, please do not disconnect the USB flash memory.
・ Quick format does not support.
Insert USB flash memory to USB port.
Note:
It takes time to format the USB flash memory. Format time is very similar to the time you want to format the PC.
167
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.8 SYSTEM SETTING
It not only sets the system to boot but it sets also the displayed units and own ship outline, the radar range to be used.
① Long press the MENU button.
② Input "0" and press ENT button. ③ Select "System Setting."
④ Select each setting item.
Press the cross key
(down) or turn the MULTI control to move to the next page.
8.8.2
8.8.3
Master/Slave/Demo
Own Outline
Barge Outline
Bearing Marker
Operation Numeric Display
Unit
Move Own Ship
Range
8.8.6
8.8.8
168
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
8.8.1 MASTER/SLAVE/DEMO
Master: Set to this item when connecting to scanner.
Slave: Set to this item when input video signal of external source to display echo without scanner.
Demo: Set to this item when no video signal is input from external source and no scanner is connected.
8.8.2 OWN OUTLINE
Select the own ship outline display on/off.
You can set the outline of the own ship in meters. In order to reduce the distance measurement error due to radar, please also set the installation position of the scanner.
Select each setting item. Press the cross key or turn the MULTI control to set the value.
* The same operation can be used to enter
2. Full Width ~ 6.Scanner (side).
8.8.3 BARGE OUTLINE
Select the own ship outline display on/off.
You can set the outline and position of the barge ship in meters.
8.8.4 BEARING MARKER
Set the bearing marker to display rotated image along the bearing signal.
Select " Rotate Step " and set the unit of angle for rotating the marker.
This function only works in Head Up (H-UP) mode.
8.8.5 OPERATION NUMERIC DISPLAY
Turn on/off the numeric display.
If this function is turned on, numeric information is displayed when following operation performed.
EBL/VRM/Parallel Cursor/Gain/Sea/Rain/Brill/PRF fine tuning
Numeric display is disappeared after the operation.
169
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.8.6 UNIT
Set the unit that you have accustomed.
Select each setting item. Range
Distance
Speed
Depth
User Depth
Temperature
Wind
* Need to receive True wind
speed for using Bft.
Size/Location Setting
8.8.7 MOVE OWN SHIP
It sets the used signal to a reference of how to move the ship. " Lat/Lon (latitude and longitude) " is initial value. There is no need to change it if you have a stable operation of the radar.
170
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
8.8.8 RANGE
Turn on/off the range display.
* The maximum range of JMA-3404 and JMA-3406/HS is 48NM (48sm).
SETTINGS
Select each setting item.
NM km sm
Select ON/OFF.
171
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.9 DISPLAY SCREEN
172
You can set the display screen color.
① Long press the MENU button. ② Input "0" and press ENT button.
④ Select each setting item.
8.9.2
Standby Numeric Display
Day/Dusk/Night
Numeric Display
Wide Screen
Time
③ Select "Display Screen."
8.9.3
8.9.1 STANDBY NUMERIC DISPLAY
Switch on/off for numerical information display in standby mode.
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
If you turn on, numeric information is displayed in standby mode. Default is off.
8.9.2 DISPLAY COLOR
Select each setting item.
Select "Color" and "Brilliance".
The colors that can be set vary depending on the item.
* "Keyboard Unit Brilliance"
has only Brilliance setting.
Dusk and Night can be set in the same way.
There is that you cannot select the color combination. For example, PPI color is black and Character color is black.
173
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.9.3 OPERATION NUMERIC DISPLAY
Set the numerical information on the screen by setting Numeric Display (0) ~ (12).
Setting each item, display will be such following image.
Set items on Numeric Display Numeric Display is turned Off
Reference:
When the numerical display is set, it is displayed at the following positions.
If you set item on (4) ~ (12), numerical information is displayed over the PPI. In this case, numeric information is displayed translucently.
Set items on Numeric Display (4), (5)
Select the display on/off in other items.
You can switch wind mode true or relative in " Wind mode.
"
174
8.9.4 WIDE SCREEN
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
Set the display of radar echo to wide.
Default is " Standard.
" If you select " Wide " , radar echo image extend to outer PPI.
Screen of “Standard” Screen of “Wide”
8.9.5 TIME
Set the kind of time displayed.
You can select display time from " UTC " , " LT " , " None.
" Time display is not shown if you set " None.
"
175
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.10 RADAR ECHO COLOR
Set the color of radar image.
Adjust the color so that easy to see while checking the display.
① Long press the MENU button. ② Input "0" and press ENT button.
④ Select each setting item.
Yellow
Green
③ Select "RADAR Echo Color."
Orange
Color
Custom
Adjust Echo Color
176
8.11 ERROR ALARM MASK
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
Even if error is detected, it can be set not to display an error on the screen.
Do not change the setting value carelessly.
When alarm detection is turned off or the detection time is changed, it is serious alarm occurs or possibilities delay in alarm occurrence etcetera.
① Long press the MENU button. ② Input "0" and press ENT button.
③ Turn the cross key (down) or the
MULTI control right to move the page and select "Error Alarm Mask.
”
④ Select each setting item.
8.11.1
Scanner Connection Device
8.11.3
8.11.2
Display Unit RX Data
8.11.4
177
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.11.1 SCANNER
Select each setting item Select an item and change the setting.
*The setting items that are displayed are the same even if you select something other than “Scanner(Time Out).”
Alarm Detection On: An abnormal condition is detected and an alarm is generated.
Off: An alarm does not occur.
“Detection Time” the time from when an abnormality is detected until an alarm occurs.
You can set between 0 and 999 seconds.
If a normal condition is detected within a set time after an error is detected, no alarm is generated.
Note :
The communication cycle for reporting the status varies depending on the device.
If a detection time shorter than the communication cycle is set, an abnormal condition may be recognized incorrectly.
8.11.2 DISPLAY UNIT
Set alarm detection for the Display Unit.
The contents that can be set by selecting each item and the operation method are the same as for
8.11.1 SCANNER.
178
8.11.3 CONNECTION DEVICE
Set alarm detection for the Connection Device.
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE
SETTINGS
The contents that can be set by selecting each item and the operation method are the same as for
8.11.1 SCANNER.
8.11.4 RX DATA
Set alarm detection for the RX Data.
Press the cross key (down) or turn the
MULTI control to move to the next page.
The contents that can be set by selecting each item and the operation method are the same as for
8.11.1 SCANNER.
179
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.12 NETWORK
8.12.2
The Network function is used for the display and operation of one antenna with two display units and the transmission of radar echoes.
① Long press the MENU button. ② Input "0" and press ENT button.
③ Press the cross key (down) or turn the
MULTI control right to move the page and select “Network.”
8.12.1
④ Select each setting item.
Network Function RADAR echo transmission setting
8.12.3
IP Address
180
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.12.1 NETWORK FUNCTION
Toggle Network Function on and off.
8.12.2
IP ADDRESS
Set the IP Address of display unit.
Valid only when the 8.12.1 NETWORK FUNCTION is on.
8.12.3
RADAR ECHO TRANSMISSION SETTING
Set the transmission of radar echo image.
Valid only when the 8.12.1 NETWORK FUNCTION is on.
Select each setting item.
RADAR echo transmission function
Multicast IP
Output Form
Data Format
8.12.3.1
8.12.3.2
8.12.3.3
8.12.3.4
181
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.12.3.1 RADAR ECHO TRANSMISSION FUNCTION
Set the On/Off of radar echo transmission function.
8.12.3.2 MULTICAST IP
Set the Multicast IP of radar echo transmission.
8.12.3.3 OUTPUT FORM
Set the Output Form of radar echo transmission.
8.12.3.4 DATA FORMAT
Set the Data Format of radar echo transmission.
182
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.13 NMEA2000
Set the NMEA2000.
To use NMEA2000 with the JMA-3400 series, an optional NMEA cable is required.
① Long press the MENU button.
② Input "0" and press ENT button.
③ Turn the cross key (down) or the
MULTI control right to move the page and select “NMEA2000.”
④ Select each setting item.
8.13.1
NMEA2000 Out NMEA2000 PGN
8.13.2
183
Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
8.13.1 NMEA2000 OUT
Set whether to output NMEA2000 Out.
8.13.2 NMEA2000 PGN
Set whether to use this equipment for each NMEA2000 PGN.
For the NMEA2000 PGN supported by this device, refer to 12.7.1 I/O SIGNALS.
Select each setting item.
Change ON / OFF.
Press the cross key (down) or turn the MULTI control to move to the next page.
*The setting items that are displayed are the same even if you select something other than “Water Speed.”
184
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
DANGER
Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the equipment by users. Inspection or repair work by unauthorized personnel may result in fire hazard or electric shock.
For inspection and repair work of equipment components, consult with our branch office, branch shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district.
When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the main power off.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution.
Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment. Especially when a rectifier is used, make sure to turn it off since voltage is still outputted from the rectifier even after the indicator and the radar are turned off. Failure to comply may result in equipment failure, or death or serious injury due to electric shock.
For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make the maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly, troubles will reduce.
It is recommended to make regular maintenance work.
Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follow:
Clean the equipment.
Remove the dust, dirt, and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of dry cloth.
Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation.
185
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.2 MAINTENANCE OF EACH UNIT
9.2.1 SCANNER UNIT NKE-2043, 2063A/AHS, 2103-4/4HS/6/6HS
DANGER
When conducting maintenance work on the antenna, make sure to turn its main power off.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution or injuries.
Make sure to turn off the antenna operation switch.
Failure to comply may result in injuries caused by physical contact with the rotating antenna.
Do not touch the radiator. Even if the power is turned off, the radiator may be rotated by the wind.
186
After the work, turn "ON" the scanner unit safety switch.
➢ Precautions in Mounting the Cover
When the cover is removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and refitted after such work, the procedures of fastening bolts shall be taken with the following precautions:
⚫ The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N•cm (120 to
150kgf•cm) (which makes the inside water-tight and protects the packings against permanent compressive strain). The packings start producing from the cover at a torque of approximately 1470N•cm (150kgf•cm). Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the specified value. Otherwise, the screws may be broken.
⚫ Use an offset wrench of 11 mm × 13 mm or a double-ended wrench of 13 mm × 17 mm
(not longer than 200 mm).
⚫ Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten them evenly in order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the bolts with 25% of the required torque at the first step.)
*: Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order.
4-M5 (stainless steel) bolt
⑤
① ③
Tightening torque: 120 to 150 kgf/cm
④ ⑥
NKE-2043 Cover Bolt
Tightening Procedure
②
②
①
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
4-M8 (stainless steel) bolt
Tightening torque: 120 to 150 kgf/cm
④
④ ③
③
NKE-2063A/AHS Cover Bolt
Tightening Procedure
4-M8 (stainless steel) bolt
Tightening torque: 120 to 150 kgf/cm
② ①
NKE-2103-4/4HS/6/6HS Cover
Bolt Tightening Procedure
➢ Radiator
Note:
If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled with smoke, salt, dust, paint or birds’ droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth wetted with alcohol or water and try to keep it clean at all times. Otherwise, radar beam radiation may attenuate or reflect on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance.
Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine, trichloroethylene and ketone for cleaning.
Otherwise, the radiation plane may deteriorate.
Check up and clean the radiator.
➢
Rotating section
⚫ Oiling gears
Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Oiling in short intervals is more effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service life, but oil at least every six months.
Use the grease of Mobilux 2 of Mobil Oil.
187
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
⚫ Driving motor
1) Attenuator
Greasing is not necessary unless there is oil leakage.
2) Motor
The life span of the brush itself is 2000 hours. When the brush is worn out to a half of the entire length, replace it.
The communicator must be kept clean all the time. If carbon dust is stuck and cannot be removed with a dry cloth, polish the section with sand paper of No.150 to 400.
The carbon brush can be removed by removing the caps on both sides of the bottom of the motor. replacement carbon brushes
Spring
Scanner unit model name
Item name
Communicator contact side
Carbon brush
Model name JRC code
JMA-3406 Carbon brush 54531-01 BRXP05247
⚫ Mounting legs
Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the scanner unit case for corrosion at intervals and maintain them to prevent danger. Apply paint to them once a half year because painting is the best measure against corrosion.
9.2.2 DISPLAY NCD-2364
DANGER
When cleaning the display screen, do not wipe it too strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the screen surface.
Dust accumulated on the screen will reduce clarity and darken the video.
For cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton).
Do not wipe it strongly with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner.
188
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is found, investigate it immediately.
Pay special attention to the high voltage sections in checking and take full care that no trouble is caused by any error or carelessness in measurement. Please take note of the results of checking, the reason can be used effectively in the next check work.
Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 9.3.1 Performance Check List in the order as specified in it.
Equipment
Scanner Unit
Item to be checked
Tuning
Magnetron Current
Antenna Rotation
Criteria or Method
Can be adjusted tuning at the manual tune.
Observe a weak echo as far possible.
9.3.1 Test-System
Information
Scanner information
The bar is 50% more
Rotation speed can change slow, when small Range changing to up.
Can be correctly controlled using the functional icon.
Display Unit Gain can be
LCD brilliance can be
Marker can be
VRM can be
EBL can be
Communication Lines
Key
Key Light
Buzzer
Memory
Error Logging check
Software check
9.3.8 Self Test
Line Test
9.3.8 Self Test
Key Test
9.3.8 Self Test
Key Light Test
9.3.8 Self Test
Buzzer Test
9.3.8 Self Test
Memory Test
9.3.1 Test-System
Information
Error Log
9.3.1 Test-System
Information
System Information
Table 9.3.1 Performance Check List
Remarks
24NM or 48NM range during transmitting
189
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.3.1 TEST-SYSTEM INFORMATION
The performance status of this radar equipment can be checked on the Test Menu. Please run as needed.
1) Long press the MENU button.
2) Input 0 at Code Input screen, and press the ENT button.
3) Select the Test-System Information at the Adjust Menu.
4) Select each item.
9.3.2 SYSTEM INFORMATION
Displays the current system information. (software version information)
⚫ KERNEL
⚫ DRIVER
⚫ DISPLAY
⚫ FPGA
⚫ ARPA
⚫ SCANNER
9.3.3 SYSTEM TIME
Displays the following system time information.
⚫ Indicator Running Time
⚫ Scanner Transmit Time
⚫ Scanner Motor Running Time
⚫ Scanner Running Time
190
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.3.4 SCANNER INFORMATION
Displays the following scanner information.
⚫ Scanner Transmit Power
⚫ Motor Type
⚫ Magnetron Current
9.3.5 HARDWARE INFORMATION
Displays the following hardware information.
⚫ Serial Number
⚫ MAC Address
⚫ Temperature
⚫ Monitor Brilliance
9.3.6 ERROR LOG
The error log displays previously occurred system alarms with the dates and times when they occurred.
9.3.7 LINE MONITOR
Serial communication data can be seen on the built-in Line monitor.
Line monitor can be used to make sure that the serial data are received properly.
191
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.3.8 SELF TEST
The following tests can be performed.
⚫ Key Test
⚫ Buzzer Test
⚫ Key Light Test
⚫ Monitor Display Test
⚫ Memory Test
⚫ Line Test
⚫ Scanner Test
9.3.8.1 KEY TEST
Performs the operation unit test.
The following screen is displayed, then operates the operation unit to check.
Press the CLR button twice to back to the Self Test menu.
9.3.8.2 MONITOR DISPLAY TEST
Pattern 1 to 8 tests can be performed.
Pattern 8 can be displayed with specifying RGB values.
Pattern 1 to 7 are as follows.
Pattern 1 (White screen)
Pattern 2 (Black screen) Pattern 3
192
Pattern 4
Pattern 6
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
Pattern 5
Pattern 7
193
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.3.9 SOFTWARE UPDATE
Store the update software in the “JMA-3400\UPDATE” folder of the USB memory.
Press STBY button and TX/PRF button at the same time to turn off the display unit.
Connect a USB memory to the USB port on the front of the display unit.
Press STBY button to turn on the display unit.
An update confirmation screen will be displayed. Follow the on-screen instructions to update.
When the update is complete, remove the USB memory and restart the display unit.
Refer to 9.3.2 SYSTEM INFORMATION to confirm the updated version.
194
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
The system includes parts that need periodic replacement. The parts should be replaced as scheduled.
Use of parts over their service life can cause a system failure.
Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body. When it is necessary to get close to the antenna for maintenance or inspection purposes, make sure to turn the indicator power switch to “OFF” or “STBY.”
When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn off the power and unplug the power connector J1 of the display unit so that the power supply to the equipment is completely cut off.
Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work without unplugging the power connector may result in electrocution, equipment failure, or accidents.
Make sure to shut off the main power before replacing parts.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution or equipment failure.
When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5 minutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution.
Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must get close to the magnetron.
Failure to comply may result in damage to the watch since the magnetron is a strong magnet.
Since it will be high voltage temporarily remains in the circuit even after the main power is shut off.
If you will touch the modulator, it should be touch after a few minutes for discharging of high voltage.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution.
195
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.4.1 PARTS REQUIRED FOR PERIODIC REPLACEMENT
There are parts required for periodic replacement.
Parts Name Interval
Magnetron
Motor
4,000 hours
10,000 hours
LCD Backlight 50,000 hours
Carbon brush (NKE-2063A) 2,000 hours
In many cases, parts required for periodic replacement works interval hours or more, but if it is over the interval hours it is recommended to replace the early.
The occurrence of phenomenon when parts were consumed)
Magnetron: The radar sensitivity decreases, and it becomes difficult to take the tune.
Motor: Allophone generation and rotation instability or stop.
Parts life time might become remarkably short by vibration of radar mast more than product standard.
196
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.5 FAULT FINDING
9.5.1 ALARMS AND OTHER DISPLAY LISTS
If any of the following alarm occurs, the system displays the alarm message in red in order to attract the attention of operator. Other messages are displayed with the suitable color which is yellow or blue depending on the level of message importance.
The following table shows alarms and other indications the system displays.
Alarm Code
S001
S002
S003
S004
S005
S006
S007
S008
S009
S010
S011
D001
D002
D003
D004
D005
D006
D007
D008
D009
D010
D011
D012
D013
Alarm Name
Alarm Error
Scanner(AZI)
Scanner(HL)
Scanner(MHV)
Scanner(Time out)
Scanner(Data)
Scanner(EEPROM)
Scanner(Heater)
Scanner(Reverse)
Scanner(Video)
Scanner(Trigger)
GPS Port
NMEA1 Port
NMEA2 Port
NMEA3 Port
Scanner Port
Keyboard
GYRO(Time Out)
Log(Time Out)
GYRO(Data)
Log(Data)
Heading(Time Out)
Heading(Data)
2AXG(Time Out)
Class Description
Alarm
Cannot send the alarm because of insufficient message buffer for alarm task.
The BP error bit of scanner communication data is set.
Alarm
The BZ error bit of scanner communication data is set.
Alarm
Alarm
The high-voltage modulator error bit of scanner communication data is set.
No reply from the scanner after data communication.
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Collision occurs when transmitting data to the scanner.
Checksum of the received data is different.
Stored value error is returned from the scanner when the initial adjustment data is requested.
The save operation is not completed when data save is requested to scanner EEPROM.
The MAG heater voltage error bit of scanner communication data is set.
The Scanner reverse bit of scanner communication data is set.
Alarm
The VIDEO error bit of scanner communication data is set.
Alarm
The TRIGGER error bit of scanner communication data is set.
Alarm
Serial driver error occurs.
Alarm
Serial driver error occurs.
Alarm
Serial driver error occurs.
Alarm
Serial driver error occurs.
Alarm
Serial driver error occurs.
Alarm
Serial driver error occurs.
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
For heading equipment=GYRO, cannot receive valid sentences
(including checksum error) which had been received properly.
For speed equipment=log, cannot receive valid sentences
(including checksum error) which had been received properly.
For heading equipment=GYRO, the GYRO error bit of NSK communication data is set.
For speed equipment=log, the LOG error bit of NSK communication data is set.
For heading equipment=compass, cannot receive valid NMEA bearing sentences (including checksum error) which had been received properly.
For heading equipment=compass, cannot receive valid NMEA bearing data which had been received properly.
For speed equipment =2-axis log, cannot receive valid VBW sentences(including checksum error) which had been received properly.
197
D038
D039
D040
D041
D042
D043
D030
D031
D032
D033
D034
D035
D036
D037
D022
D023
D024
D025
D026
D027
D028
D029
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
Alarm Code Alarm Name
D014 2AXG(Data)
D015 GPS(Time Out)
D016
D017
D018
D019
D020
D021
GPS(Position)
GPS(Datum)
GPS(Speed)
GPS(Status)
Depth(Time Out)
Depth(Data)
TEMP(Time Out)
TEMP(Data)
Wind(Time Out)
Wind True(Data)
Wind Relative(Data)
Turn(Time Out)
Turn(Data)
Rudder(Time Out)
Rudder(Data)
AIS(Time Out)
AIS(Data)
AIS(Alarm001)
AIS(Alarm002)
AIS(Alarm003)
AIS(Alarm004)
AIS(Alarm005)
AIS(Alarm006)
AIS(Alarm008)
AIS(Alarm025)
AIS(Alarm026)
AIS(Alarm029)
AIS(Alarm030)
Class Description
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
For speed equipment=2-axis log, cannot receive valid VBW ground data which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid GPS sentences(including checksum error) which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid position data which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid geodetic data which had been received properly.
For Speed equipment=GPS, cannot receive valid speed data which bad been received properly.
Received GPS fixing status error (invalid) data
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
Cannot receive valid depth sentences (including checksum error) which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid depth data which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid water temperature sentences which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid water temperature data which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid wind direction/wind velocity sentences
(including checksum error) which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid wind direction/wind velocity (true) data had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid wind direction/wind velocity (relative) data had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid turning ratio sentences (including checksum error) which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid turning ratio data which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid steering direction sentences (including checksum error) which had been received properly.
Cannot receive valid steering direction data which had been received properly
For AIS function=ON, cannot receive valid AIS data (including checksum error) which had been received properly.
For AIS function=ON, cannot receive valid AIS data which had been received properly.
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
198
Alarm Code
D044
D045
D046
D047
D048
D049
D050
D051
Alarm Name
AIS(Alarm032)
AIS(Alarm035)
Set Gyro
DSP(Video)
DSP(Trigger)
DSP(AZI)
DSP(HL)
DSP Error
D052 LAT(Out of Bounds)
D053
D055
D056
D057
TT(Out of Range)
Flash ROM Error
USB Error
SD Error
Alarm Name
Area1(Approach)
Area1(Secession)
Area1(Out of Range)
Area2(Approach)
Area2(Secession)
Area2(Out of Range)
TT(CPA/TCPA)
TT(New Target)
TT(Lost)
Dragging anchor
GPS(Error)
GPS(HDOP)
TM Reset
No Heading Data
On Preheating
Short Interval
Error Occurring
Max Point
File Not Found
USB Memory Not Set
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
Class Description
Alarm
Alarm
Status
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
For AIS function=ON, an error from the AIS receiver is received(ALR).
Requires setting of true bearing.
Alarm
DSP detects VIDEO error.
Alarm
DSP cannot receive TI interrupt.
Alarm
DSP cannot receive BP interrupt.
Alarm
DSP cannot receive BZ interrupt.
Alarm
Abnormal operation(infinite loop) of DSP.
Caution
Alarm
The own ship’s latitude is 80 degrees or more (indicating that some functions are limited). Display AIS, waypoint, mark/line, own ship trail, etc. for 80 degrees or more.
Input operations for 80 degrees or more
( refer to “High Latitude “alarm)
TT is too far to be tracked.
Alarm
Initialization error of flash ROM file system during startup.
Alarm
Initialization error of USB during startup.
Chart SD card reading error.
Class Description
Alarm
Echo in area1.
Alarm
No echo in area1.
Alarm
Alarm
Rectangle area 1 is out of range.
Creation of area 1 is out of range.
Echo in area2.
Alarm
No echo in area2.
Alarm
Alarm
Rectangle area 2 is out of range.
Creation of area 2 is out of range.
TT is changed to a dangerous ship
Alarm
TT is automatically acquired.
Alarm
TT is lost.
Alarm
The ship has left the dragging anchor monitoring area.
Status
Failed to set GPS.
Caution
Received excessive HDOP value beyond the setting.
Status
For TM, the own ship position is out of 40% of the radius of PPI.
Status
Status
Cannot function because own ship heading is not available
- Operations for specifying TT acquisition/numerical display
- Changing to TM
- Changing to N Up/C Up
Transmission operation during preheating
Status
Status
Status
Transmission operation in the interval of 1 second or less between standby and transmission
Transmission operation during prohibition of transmission caused by scanner error
Exceeded the maximum number of marks.
Status
File does not exists.
Status
USB memory does not exists.
199
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
Alarm Name
SD Memory Not Set
File Read Error
File Write Error
Not Enough Space
Format Error
Num of files Over
File Erase Error
TT(Max Target)
Unsetting
Invalid Data
In Operation
No HDG/POSN Data
Not Allowed
Range Scale Limit
No Valid Data
Class Description
Status
SD memory does not exists.
Caution
Failed to load the file.
Caution
Failed to write the file.
Status
Insufficient capacity.
Caution
Failed to format
Caution
Caution
Writing data to the USB memory in which the number of the file has reached to the maximum.
Failed to delete the file
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Manually acquired when the number of acquisition reached maximum.
Detected when DSP tries to acquire 11 targets or more. DSP notifies the maximum target alarm occurrence of automatic acquisition tot the TT process task, then the TT process task notifies it to the alarm task.
Zone creation operations for guard zone = Off
EBL bearing setting while EBL is off
Floating setting while EBL/VRM is off
VRM range setting while VRM is off
Manual tuning setting while automatic tuning is on
AIS operations while AIS function is off
TT operations while TT function is off
Cannot function due to invalid value
- Invalid code is input for the code input screen
This operation is disabled due to another operation
- Setting enable/disable and level during guard zone creation
- Operations for on/off during VRM range setting
- Operations for PRF tuning during manual tuning operations
- Setting for automatic/manual mode during manual tuning
Operations
- Operations for manual tuning during PRF tuning operation
Cursor operations when own heading or latitude/longitude is disabled
- MOB input
- Event mark input
- Inputting/erasing/moving marks
- Inputting/erasing/moving/inserting lines
- AIS numerical display/destination ship/retrieved vessel
Selection
- Creating latitude/longitude guard zone.
- TLL transmission for cursor.
Operations for inserting by selecting the end point in the line list.
Operations for switching to H-UP during TM (When heading is not available, temporarily changed to RM-HUp, therefore, message is disabled.)
Operations functionally restricted for certain range.
Off center operations in range where off center is not available.
TM setting operations in range where TM setting is not available.
Operations without data.
Status
200
Alarm Name
Scanner Standby
High Temperature
High Latitude
Invalid Version
TT(Max Target)
TT(Out of Range)
MAX Range Scale
MIN Range Scale
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
Class Description
Status
Caution
The functions which are available only during transmitting are operated during standby (or preheating).
- Setting Timed TX to on.
- Cursor operations during standby (no graphic display is available).
- Custom position setting for off center.
- Inputting/erasing/moving marks
- Inputting/erasing/moving/inserting lines
- TT acquisition/release/numerical display selection.
- Guard zone creation
The temperature in the radar antenna is 80 ℃ or higher.
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Operations for the position of latitude 80 degrees or more.
MOB input.
Event mark input.
Input/moving marks.
Input/moving/inserting lines.
Creating latitude/longitude alarm area.
Program is loading a file with an incompatible version.
- Internal setting
- Marks/lines
- Option languages
- STC curve
Detected when DSP tries to acquire 21 targets or more
DSP notifies the maximum target alarm occurrence of automatic acquisition to the TT process task, then the TT process task notifies it to the alarm task
TT is too far to be tracked
Range up operations at the maximum range
Range down operations at the minimum range
201
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.6 TROUBLE SHOOTING
As this radar equipment includes complicated circuits, it is necessary to request a specialist engineer for repair or instructions for remedy if any circuit is defective.
There are also troubles by the following causes, which should be referred to in checking or repair work.
⚫ Poor Contact in Terminal Board of Inter-Unit Cables.
⚫ Poor contact in terminal board.
⚫ The cable end is not fully connected, that it, contacted with earthed another terminal.
⚫ Disconnected cable wire.
⚫ Poor Contact of Connector with in Unit.
9.6.1 SPECIAL PARTS
JMA-3404
Location Parts No.
Scanner V101
Scanner A101
Scanner A102
JMA-3406/HS
Location Parts No.
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Name
Magnetron
Circulator
Diode Limiter
Name
Scanner V101
Scanner A101
Scanner A102
JMA-3411-4/4HS/6/6HS
Magnetron
Circulator
Diode Limiter
Location Parts No. Name
V101 Magnetron
A101/ A102 Circulator
A103
A104
A301
Dummy
Filter
Diode Limiter
Type Code Manufacture
MSF1421B 5VMAA00092 NJRC
FCX68R 5AJIX00027 Orient Microwave
NJS6930 5ATBT00006 NJRC
Type Code Manufacture
MSF1422B 5VMAA00090 NJRC
FCX68R 5AJIX00027 Orient Microwave
NJS6930 5ATBT00006 NJRC
Type Code Manufacture
MAF1565N 5VMAA00102 NJRC
FCX68R 5AJIX00027 Orient Microwave
NJC4002
NJC9952
NJS6930
5ANDF00001
5AWAX00002
5ATBT00006
NJRC
NJRC
NJRC
202
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
9.6.2 CIRCUIT BLOCK TO BE REPAIRED
JMA-3404
Location Circuit Block Type Remarks
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Motor unit
Compound Modulator
Circuit
Receiver
Processing circuit
TT circuit
Keyboard circuit
USB/SD I/F circuit
Power supply circuit
I/F circuit
Scanner I/F circuit
7BDRD0052*
CME-385
NRG-239
CDC-1497
CDC-1498
CCK-1141
CMH-2515
CBD-2028
CMH-2512
CMH-2513
Include CAE-548
Power supply I/F circuit CMH-2514
LCD module CML-872
Fuse MF60NR 250V 10 F1
"*" means revision, such as A, B and so on.
JMA3406/HS
Location Circuit Block Type Remarks
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Motor unit
Compound Modulator
Circuit
Receiver
Processing circuit
TT circuit
Keyboard circuit
CBP-218
CME-386A
NRG-239
CDC-1497
CDC-1498
CCK-1141
USB/SD I/F circuit CMH-2515
Power supply circuit CBD-2028
I/F circuit
Scanner I/F circuit
CMH-2512
CMH-2513
Power supply I/F circuit CMH-2514
LCD module
Fuse
CML-872
MF60NR 250V 10
Include CAE-548
F1
203
Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
JMA-3411-4/4HS/6/6HS
Location Circuit Block
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Display Unit
Type Remarks
Motor with gear
Modulation circuit
Receiver
Power supply circuit
I/F circuit
Scanner I/F circuit
Power supply I/F circuit
LCD module
Fuse
7BDRD0048*
CME-363A
NRG-610A
CBD-2783
DC brushless motor
Excluding Magnetron
Include CAE-529A-1
Encoder
Motor control power
CHT-71C
CBD-1779
TT circuit
Keyboard circuit
USB/SD I/F circuit
Power supply circuit
CDC-1497
CDC-1498
CCK-1141
CMH-2515
CBD-2028
CMH-2512
CMH-2513
CMH-2514
CML-872
MF60NR 250V 10 F1
"*" means revision, such as A, B and so on.
204
Chapter 10 AFTER SALE SERVICE
Chapter 10 AFTER-SALE SERVICE
10.1 KEEPING PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
Keeping period of maintenance parts is ten years from the production is discontinued.
10.2 WHEN YOU REQUEST FOR REPAIR
If you suppose the product may be out of order, read the description in "9.5 FAULT FINDING" and
"9.6 TROUBLE SHOOTING", and check the suspected point again.
If it is still out of order, you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment and consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product, or our branch office in your country or district, the sales department in our main office in Tokyo.
⚫ Repair within the Warranty Period
If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC will repair free of charge.
In case that any failure is caused due to misuse, faulty operation, negligence or force major such as natural disaster and fire, the product will be repaired with charges.
⚫ Repair after the Warranty Period.
If any defective function of the product is recoverable by repair, the repair of it will be made at your own charge upon your request.
⚫ Necessary Information for Repair
☆ Product name, model, manufacturing date and serial number
☆ Trouble conditions (as detailed as possible. Refer to page " 10.4 RADAR FAILURE CHECK
LIST.
")
☆ Name of company/organization, address and telephone number
10.3 RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE
The performance of the product may deteriorate due to the secular change of the parts used in it, though such deterioration depends upon the conditions of operation.
So checkup and maintenance is recommendable for the product in addition to your daily care.
For maintenance, consult with the near-by dealer or our sales department.
Such maintenance will be made with charges.
For further details of after-sale service, contact the JRC Offices.
206
10.4 RADAR FAILURE CHECK LIST
Chapter 10 AFTER-SALE SERVICE
JMA
207
Chapter 11 DISPOSAL
Chapter 11 DISPOSAL
11.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT
When disposing of this unit, be sure to follow the local laws and regulations for the place of disposal.
11.2 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON
A magnetron is used for the scanner (NKE-2043, NKE-2063A/AHS, NKE-2103-4/4HS and
NKE-2103-6/6HS).
☆ When the magnetron is replaced with a new one, return the used magnetron to our dealer or business office.
For detail, consult with our dealer or business office.
11.3 CHINA ROHS
208
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
209
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
12.1 SCANNER DIMENSION
12.1.1 NKE-2043
210
----~--
1190 <SWING CIRCLE ¢1220l
( .AC-'?'-It-?11-
0122 0 )
N}§
~ 1 1 ,.20
ROT ATION CE NTE R
@JE:'I'·Ci
M OJNTING D I MENSI(]IIS
(T()J V IE WJ llXtt"ti* ~
(.timiD
4-012 MCXJNT I NG 8Q T M1 0 n#>t: n.f M10
SAFETY SWITCH
*A{?f
RECOMMENDED EARTH
TERM I NAL POSIT I CJ-l (M12 8Q Tl
HOLDING 8Q T M12
HlltHU M12
Ln
,..,
4-¢ 12 MOJNTING HQES
JIX#J\
CAJTUNE
DIMENSICN5
OVER TO
3
5
30
120
5
30
120
400
400 1000
1000 2000
2000 4000
?
H I ~-ti1<
HH l-:.rf
3 5
5
30
30
120
120 400
400 1000
1000 2000
2000 4000
PERM 15Sl8LE
CAJTLINE
D I ME NSla-I AL
DEVIAT l a-15
•0 .
5
•1
• 1.5
•2.5
1L
•6
•8
?Hf~-ti1< ff~~
·0.5
•1
•1.5
•2.5
1L
•6
·8
PERMISSI8LE
MCAJNTI NO
DIMENSla-IAL
OEV I ATla-15
·0.5
11
•2
·3 llXf1 ff~~
•0
•1
•2
•3
.
-ti1<
5
MASS
UNIT
COLOR
COLOR f! f!
••
JJill
APPROX . 21 kg mm
ANTENNA WHITE
PEDESTAL WHITE f:J 2 1 kg mm fi!UB 8
~-TA-?118
CABLE INLET
7-/Jv ttA .
D
e e e e
_L
I
4FT 1285 (SWING CIRC LE C/> 1 320l
( 7.. o• ?'if-?'" ¢1320> e e e e
MOUNT I NG HOLES
~#7\.
F ffiWARD
<=m
32.8
>t I E > 1 'E 41.2 4-r/112 MOUNTING BQ T M10
65 _ /
~#;rJH
M10
SAFE T Y SWITCH
~~7..1
·:;'f o o < q m < D N
N N D
N
.....
<0
RO T I ON CENTER
@J fi'l'• IJ ftCOMMENDED EAR TH
TERM INAL POSITI()\J ( M 12 BQ Tl
HOLDING BQ T M12
:tilt!fl-lt~~l M12
M OUNTING D I MENSIONS ( T Cf' VIE W l
~#'1i1;tl!'l (l.
oo W
Ln
Ln
N ~
N
I .; : ..... r...:
.....
·~ q ' '
( 337)
CIJ T ltE
IJIEN!DIS
IMR TO
3 6
6
30
120
30
120
400
400 1000
1000 2000
2000 4000
·4
·6
•8
PE~
CIJTltE
-
~'IIATDIS
•0 .
5
•1
•1.5
•2.5 •'
·2
·3
-
PEIMSSILE
IO.NTNl
~'IIATDIS
•0.5
?1-~"t~ u~ ~n
3
6
6
30
30
120
120
400
400 1000
1000 2000
2000 4000
?1-~"t~ tf~~
•0.5
·1
•1.5
·2.5
•4
·6
· 8 ntt-t~ tf~~
·0.5
•'
·2
·3
UN IT
COLOR
COLOR
• •
.IIi it!
~
~
A P PR O X. 3 4 kg mm
A N TEN NA WHIT E
PEDESTAL W HITE f,j 34 kg mm
• ~s
~ TA~ Ji.e e
•
0
•
•
0
•
I
I
1
____
j_ ___
_
I
6 F T 1 880 I SWI N G C I RCLE ¢19101
(.7..1'~?' if?!~ ¢1910l
260
• •
• •
0
0
4-1/112 M()JNTING HQES l!X#l\
FOOWARD 32.8
.., E .., E 41.2 4 -¢ 12 MOJN TI NG
~
[ 65 .
Nl§
I
80.. T M10
/
JIX#;!:J H M10
SAFETY SWITC H
~~)..{ · :!"1·
ROT AT I ~ CENTER
@l fi 'l'·u
MOJNTING DIMENSI~S ITCf' VIEW! l!X#-ti!~ ( .UiW
REC().1MENDED EARTH
TERMINAL POSI T I~ IM 1 2 00.. Tl
HOLD I NG 80.. T M12 lt!t!tiU~a M12
...,.
....:
...,. q l
~
'""""'F ~ I
JP
OJ T I.J'£
IJMENSOIS
OYER
·o
3 6
6
30
30
12C
120 400
400 100G
1000 2000
2000 4000
461
.....,
I :?l
•8
•6
.1
.
5
-
PEIMSliLE
OJTI.I£
OEVIATOIS
-
PEIMSliLE
I4WITNl
OEVIATOIS
·0.5
,,
•2 .
5 t4 ·2
'3
?1-~-ti!
.,~~
~Hf~ii!
H~~ J;Jr
3
6
6
30
30
120
12C
400
400 100G
1000 2000
2000 40no
,1.5
•2.5
<4
·6
•8
U# i i!
.,~~
,Q.5
,,
·2
·3
MASS
UNI T
COLOR
COLOR
II.
.lltilt
~
~
APPROX . 36 kg mm
ANTENNA WHITE
PEDESTA L WHITE f..J 36 k g mm tiM !a
~77-~IL-
8
8
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
12.2 DISPLAY DIMENSION
12.2.1 NCD-2364
214
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
12.3 EQUIPMENT OUTLINE
This equipment is a marine radar for vessels and work boats which consists of the display unit including
12-inch SVGA color LCD Monitor unit, Keyboard unit, radar processing circuit, TT processing circuit, AIS processing circuit and consists of the 2ft/3.9ft/4ft/6ft scanner unit. 2ft scanner unit is radome type.
3.9ft/4ft/6ft scanner units are open-array type. The operation can be realized intuitive and simple.
12.3.1 CONFIGULATION
1) Display unit NCD-2364
・ Integrated the 12 inch SVGA color LCD Monitor unit, Keyboard unit and Processing unit
2) Scanner unit
・ X-band 2ft (4kW) radome type NKE-2043
・ X-band 3.9ft (6kW) open-array type NKE-2063A/AHS
・ X-band 4ft (10kW)
・ X-band 6ft (10kW) open-array type NKE-2103-4/4HS open-array type NKE-2103-6/6HS
12.3.2 FEATURE
1) The screen resolution is 800x600dots (SVGA).
2) Highly efficient signal processing with FPGA.
3) TT function is prepared with DSP.
4) Real-time head-up function, AIS display function and chart drawing function with CPU.
12.3.3 RADAR MODEL
JMA-3404 2ft (4kW) Standard model scanner: NKE-2043
JMA-3406 3.9ft (6kW) Standard model scanner: NKE-2063A
JMA-3406HS 3.9ft (6kW) High speed model scanner: NKE-2063AHS
JMA-3411-4 4ft (10kw) Standard model scanner: NKE-2103-4
JMA-3411-4HS 4ft (10kw)
JMA-3411-6 6ft (10kW)
JMA-3411-6HS 6ft (10kW)
High speed model scanner: NKE-2103-4HS
Standard model scanner: NKE-2103-6
High speed model scanner: NKE-2103-6HS
215
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
12.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Class of Emission
(2) Display
(3)Display capability
(4) Screen
(5) Range Scale
(6) Range Resolution
(7) Minimum Detective Range
(8) Range Accuracy
P0N
Color Raster Scan, PPI system
SVGA (800x600dots) Screen
12-inch Color LCD
Glass bonding
Radar image effective diameter 150mm or more.
0.0625, 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16,
24, 32, 48, 64, 72NM
*The used range can be disabled with user setting.
(64, 72 NM or maximum range: off-center function is not available)
Less than 30m
Less than 40m
Less than 1% of the maximum distance of the range scale in use or less than 15m whichever is larger.
Less than ±1° (9) Bearing Accuracy
(10) Bearing Indication RM: Head-up, North-up, Course-up
TM: North-up, Course-up
(11) Ambient Condition
Standards IEC60945 Ed.4.0
* Refer to the display unit specifications for detailed conditions.
Temperature:
Scanner
Display Unit
Relative Humidity
Vibration
Operation: -25 to +55°C / Storage: -25 to +70°C
Operation: -15 to +55°C / Storage: -15 to +70°C
+40°C, 93%
2 to 13.2 Hz, amplitude±1mm
Velocity of the wind
13.2 to 100 Hz @0.7 G
100kn
Waterproof/dustproof Scanner IP26
Display unit IP55
* Refer to the display unit specifications for detailed conditions.
(12) Power Supply Input DC+24V (All models, cable length of 30m or less)
DC+12V
(JMA-3404, JMA-3406, cable length of 20m or less.
*High speed model JMA-3406HS can not use DC12V.)
216
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
(13) Power Consumption:
JMA-3404
JMA-3406
JMA-3406HS
JMA-3411-4
In calm wind
Approx. 60W
Approx. 85W
Approx. 85W
Approx. 100W
JMA-3411-4HS Approx. 100W
Maximum (Velocity of the wind: 100 kn)
Approx. 60W
Approx. 180W
Approx. 230W
Approx. 210W
Approx. 360W
JMA-3411-6 Approx. 100W
JMA-3411-6HS Approx. 100W
(14) Range of power supply voltage fluctuation
Approx. 210W
Approx. 360W
+10.8 to 31.2 VDC (Display Unit) (JMA-3404, JMA-3406)
* JMA-3404/JMA-3406 input voltage upper limit is +30%
(14) Pre heat time
(15) Display unit
(16)Inter-unit Cables of DC24V.
+21.6 to 31.2 VDC (Display Unit)
(JMA-3406HS, JMA-3411-4/4HS/6/6HS)
DC12/24V -10%/+30%
Approx. within 1min30sec.
Refer to Display unit Specifications
Option
Length selectable (CFQ6912-5/10/15/20/25/30m)
When using JMA-3404 and JMA-3406 with 12V DC, the maximum cable length is 20m or less.
217
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
12.5 SCANNER
218
12.5.1 SCANNER (NKE-2043) SPECIFICATION
(1) Dimensions Height 275mm × Diameter of radome 620mm
(2) Mass
(3) Polarization
Approx. 10kg
Horizontal Polarization
(4) Directional Characteristic
Horizontal Beam Width (-3dB): 4°
Vertical Beam Width (-3dB): 25°
Sidelobe Level: -21dB or less (less than ±10° from the main lobe)
(5) Rotation Approx. 48rpm
(16/20/24/27/30/36/42/48rpm can be set)
(6) Peak Power
(7) Transmitting Frequency
4 kW
9410 ±30MHz
(8) Transmitting Tube Magnetron [MSF1421B]
(9) Pulse width/Repetition Frequency (Bandwidth) SP1: 0.08
μ s/4000Hz (20MHz)
SP2: 0.08
μ s/2250Hz (20MHz)
SP3: 0.13
μ s/1700Hz (20MHz)
MP1: 0.25
μ s/1700Hz (6MHz)
MP2: 0.5
μ s/1200Hz (3MHz)
LP1: 0.8
μ s/750Hz (3MHz)
LP2: 1.0
μ s/650Hz (3MHz)
(10) Range information 0.0625NM to 0.25NM: SP1
0.5NM: SP1, MP1
0.75NM, 1NM: SP2, MP1
1.5NM: SP2, MP1, MP2
(11) Duplexer
2NM to 4NM: SP3, MP1, MP2
6NM to 16NM: MP2, LP1, LP2
24NM to 48NM: LP2
Circulator + Diode Limiter
(12) Front End Module MIC
(13) Intermediate Frequency Amplifier
Intermediate Frequency: 60MHz
Band Width: 20MHz (0.08
μ s, 0.13
μ s)
6MHz (0.25
μ s)
3MHz (0.5
μ s, 0.8
μ s, 1.0
μ s)
Gain: More than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics: Logarithmic Amplifier
(14) Overall Noise Figure 6dB (Average)
(15) Tune AUTO/MANUAL
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
12.5.2 SCANNER (NKE-2063A/AHS) SPECIFICATION
(1) Dimensions Height 419.5mm
× Swing Circle 1220mm
(2) Mass
(3) Polarization
Approx. 21kg
Horizontal Polarization
(4) Directional Characteristic
Horizontal Beam Width (-3dB):
Vertical Beam Width (-3dB):
2°
30°
Sidelobe Level: -23dB or less (less than ±10° from the main lobe)
(5) Rotation
-26dB or less (±10° or more from the main lobe)
Approx. 27rpm (NKE-2063)
(16/17.4/19/20.6/22.2/23.8/25.4/27rpm can be set)
Approx. 48rpm (27/36/48rpm can be set)
(6) Peak Power
(7) Transmitting Frequency
6 kW
9410 ±30MHz
(8) Transmitting Tube Magnetron [MSF1422B]
(9) Pulse width/Repetition Frequency (Bandwidth) SP1: 0.08
μ s/4000Hz (20MHz)
SP2: 0.08
μ s/2250Hz (20MHz)
SP3: 0.13
μ s/1700Hz (20MHz)
MP1: 0.25
μ s/1700Hz (6MHz)
MP2: 0.5
μ s/1200Hz (3MHz)
LP1: 0.8
μ s/750Hz (3MHz)
LP2: 1.0
μ s/650Hz (3MHz)
(10) Range information 0.0625NM to 025NM: SP1
0.5NM: SP1, MP1
0.75NM, 1NM: SP2, MP1
1.5NM: SP2, MP1, MP2
(11) Duplexer
2NM to 4NM: SP3, MP1, MP2
6NM to 16NM: MP2, LP1, LP2
24NM to 48NM: LP2
Circulator + Diode Limiter
(12) Front End Module MIC
(13) Intermediate Frequency Amplifier
Intermediate Frequency: 60MHz
Band Width: 20MHz (0.08
μ s, 0.13
μ s)
6MHz (0.25
μ s)
3MHz (0.5
μ s, 0.8
μ s, 1.0
μ s)
Gain: More than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics: Logarithmic Amplifier
(14) Overall Noise Figure
(15) Tune
6dB (Average)
AUTO/MANUAL
219
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
12.5.3 SCANNER (NKE-2103-4/6/4HS/6HS) SPECIFICATION
(1) Dimensions Height: approx. 458 mm
Swing Circle: approx. 1,285mm (4ft)
Height: approx. 458 mm
Swing Circle: approx. 1910 mm (6ft)
Approx. 38 kg (4ft) (2) Mass
(3) Polarization
Approx. 40 kg (6ft)
Horizontal Polarization
(4) Directional Characteristic
Horizontal Beam Width (-3dB):
Vertical Beam Width (-3dB):
1.8° (4ft), 1.2° (6ft)
20° (4ft/6ft)
Sidelobe Level -26 dB or less (less than ±10° from the main lobe) (4ft/6ft)
-30 dB or less (±10° or more from the main lobe) (4ft/6ft)
(5) Rotation 27rpm (NKE-2103-4/6)
48rpm (NKE-2103-4HS/6HS)
(6) Transmitting Frequency
(7) Peak Power
9410 ±30 MHz
10 kW ±50%
(8) Transmitting Tube Magnetron [MAF1565N]
(9) Pulse Width/Repetition Frequency (Bandwidth) SP: 0.08
μ s/2250 Hz (20MHz)
MP1: 0.25
μ s/1700 Hz (6MHz)
MP2: 0.5
μ s/1200 Hz (3MHz)
LP1: 0.8
μ s/750 Hz (3MHz)
LP2: 1.0
μ s/650 Hz (3MHz)
(10) Range information 0.0625NM to 0.25NM: SP
0.5NM to 1NM: SP, MP1
1.5NM, 2NM:
3NM, 4NM:
SP, MP1, MP2
MP1, MP2, LP1
(10) Duplexer
6NM to 16NM: MP2, LP1, LP2
24NM to 72NM: LP2
Circulator + Diode Limiter
(11) Front End Module MIC
(12) Intermediate Frequency Amplifier
Intermediate Frequency: 60MHz
Band Width: 20MHz (0.08
μ s)
6MHz (0.25
μ s, 0.5
μ s)
3MHz (0.8
μ s, 1.0
μ s)
Gain: More than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics: Logarithmic Amplifier
(13) Overall Noise Figure 7.5dB (Average)
(14) Tune Method AUTO/MANUAL
220
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
12.6 DISPLAY
12.6.1 INTEGRATED DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-2364)
1) Structure Desk Top Integrated Type
2) Dimensions
(LCD Monitor Unit/Keyboard Unit/Processor Unit Integrated Structure)
Vertical installation only desk top integrated type
Without bracket and side knob
Height 320mm × Width 320mm × Depth 95.1mm
Including bracket and side knob
Height 340mm × Width 342mm × Depth 95.1mm
(Depth is the depth from the front panel, not including the control knobs.)
3) Mass
4) Tune Method
Approx. 5 kg
Manual / Auto
5) STC (SEA)
6) FTC (RAIN)
(Bar-graph indication is displayed at the time of adjustment.)
Manual / Auto
Manual / Auto
7) Radar Interference Rejection Built-in (The effect can be adjusted by three stages.)
8) Bearing Marker
9) Heading Line
10) Off Center
11) True Motion Unit
12) True Motion Reset Position
13) Radar trail indication
360° in 5° digit
Electronic (Can be temporarily hidden)
Move to the defined coordinates of 4 patterns
Built-in (Not available at the maximum range)
66% of radius of any range
True motion mode: Only true motion trails
Relative motion mode: True or relative motion trails
Trail time length:
Short: 15sec/30sec/1min/2min/3min/4min/5min/6min
/10min/15min/Continuous
Middle: 30sec/1min/2min/3min/4min/5min/6min/10min
/15min/30min/Continuous
Long: 1min/2min/3min/4min/5min/6min/10min/15min/
30min/1hr/Continuous
Super Long: 30min/1hr/2hr/3hr/4hr/5hr/6hr/10hr/12hr
/24hr/Continuous
The trail length can be switched instantaneously.
Possible to display time series trail and continuous trail by color classification.
Even if the movement mode, bearing mode, or range is changed, the radar trails can be taken over.
221
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
14) Variety of Pulse width
15) Target enhance
16) Plotting
4 stages
JMA-3404, JMA-3406/HS
SP1/SP2/SP3/MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
JMA-3411-4/4HS/6/6HS
SP/MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
Line/Own Track 7 colors (White, Cyan, Blue, Green, Yellow, Pink, Red)
Mark
3 types (solid line, dashed line (short), dashed line (long))
4 types (X, +, Y, )
2 sizes (Small, Large)
7 colors (White, Cyan, Blue, Green, Yellow, Pink, Red)
The maximum number of points: 10,000.
17) Display color
Radar echo 8 colors (Yellow, Green, Orange, Pink, Red, White, Color, Custom)
Radar trails Time trails: 3 colors (Cyan, White, Green)
Continuous trails: 3 colors (Dark Green, Gray, Navy Blue)
Background (inner PPI) 4 colors (Blue, Navy Blue, Black, White)
Background (outer PPI) 4 colors (Blue, Navy Blue, Black, White)
Characters
AIS/TT
7 colors (White, Cyan, Orange, Green, Black, Red, Amber)
3 colors (Cyan, Green, White)
EBL/VRM
Cursor
6 colors (Cyan, Green, Orange, Black, Pink, White)
4 colors (Red, Yellow, Pink, White)
Own Ship/Barge 4 colors (White, Cyan, Green, Red)
Range Ring 6 colors (Cyan, Orange, Red, Green, White, Amber)
Guard Zone 5 colors (White, Green, Orange, Black, Red)
18) Simulator Built-in
19) Multiple languages English, Japanese, Other one optional language
20) Range Unit NM, km, sm
21) Data-OFF screen Only minimal information. Display radar image in full screen.
22) TLL Transmit TLL (NMEA sentence) can be transmitted to the external device by
23) Screen Capture pressing the operation button
Screen can be captured by pressing button or automatically
24) Barge Outline
25) GPS receiver
(saved in USB memory).
Display 1 ship (own ship + barge).
JRC GPS receivers (JLR-4340, JLR-4341) can be connected,
GPS settings and reception status can be checked.
26) Navigation information
27) AIS information display
28) TT function Built-in
29) Waypoint display
Standard Built-in
The standby screen can be changed to a graphical screen.
Refer to AIS function.
Refer to TT function.
One mark of position information
222
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
30) Interface
DVI port
GPS port
DVI-D 1 port. SVGA (800 × 600 pixel)
1 port
Can be used as a JRC GPS port or NMEA0183 (NMEA4 TX/RX) port. Compatible with IEC61162-1/2 equivalent when used as
NMEA0183 port.
NMEA0183 port 3 ports (NMEA1 to NMEA3 TX/RX)
LAN port
Compatible with IEC61162-1/2 equivalent
1 port. Communication between JMA-3400 and display unit.
Dry contact output
Contact input
CHART CARD port
USB port
31) Waterproof/dustproof
Output the external alarms. Normally Open only.
Input the event marks.
Support for new pec and Navionics+ charts.
2 ports (front/back). Save internal data.
IP55. However, the following usage conditions are assumed.
The front “CHART CARD/USB” cover is closed.
Close the “USB, LAN, DVI” cover on the back.
The optional rubber cap (MTT317838) is attached to the cable connected to the “SCANNER” connector on the
32) EMC back.
IEC60945 Ed.4.0
However, this is not applicable if any of the following ports are used.
・ "CHART CARD/USB" port on the front.
・ "USB, DVI" port on the back.
12.6.2 OPERATIONAL PART
1) Structure Integrated on the display unit
2) Keys ENT Enter key (Selects menu items, etc.)
Cross keys Move cursor and focus
RANGE+
RANGE-
USER1
USER2
EBL
VRM
MENU
CLR
Change numeric value
Increases the distance range
Decreases the distance range
Open registered menu
Open registered menu
Press
Long press
Press
Long press
Enter EBL operation mode
Turn off EBL
Enter VRM operation mode
Turn off VRM
Opens/closes the menu screen
Cancels operations
223
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
FUNC
TX/PRF
STBY
Press
Long press
Press
Long press
Press
Change the function mode
Turn off the function mode
Starts transmission
Changes PRF during transmission
Clears HL during held down
Forced termination of preheat countdown during preheating
Starts the display unit
Stops transmission
Forced power off the display unit
3) Controls GAIN
SEA
RAIN
BRILL
MULTI
Long press
12.6.3 AIS FUNCTION (STANDARD BUILT IN)
1) Display
Number of targets Up to 100 targets (stores up to 1,000 ship static data)
Target information Displays MMSI, call sign, ship name, COG, SOG,
Filters
CPA, TCPA, direction, distance.
Distance only (initial setting value 20NM)
Constant information display 1 ship
2) Operation
3) Installation
The AIS information of the selected ship can be displayed on the screen constantly (exclusive to the
TT constant information display).
Built-in
NMEA1~3, NMEA4 (GPS), NMEA2000 available
12.6.4 TT FUNCTION (STANDARD BUILT IN)
1) Acquisition MANUAL , AUTO (by guard zone)
2) Tracking
3) Display
Tracking data
30 targets (up to 20 targets for automatic tracking)
1 ship
The TT information of the selected 1 ship can be displayed on the screen constantly (exclusive to the AIS constant information display).
Maximum tracking range 20NM (This varies depending on the range)
Target information Displays items are true bearing, distance, true course,
Display of Vectors
4) Operation and true speed.
True/Relative
Built-in
224
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
12.7 INPUT/ OUTPUT SIGNAL
12.7.1 INPUT ENABLE SIGNAL
・ NMEA0183 input sentences
(1) Navigation equipment
Lat/Lon:
SOG/COG:
Log speed:
HEADING:
DEPTH:
GGA>RMC>RMA>GNS>GLL
RMC>RMA>VTG
VBW>VHW
THS>HDT>HDG>HDM
DPT>DBT
WATER TEMP: MTW
ROT:
RUDDER:
ROT
RSA
AIS:
WIND:
VDM, VDO, ALR
MWV>VWT, VWR
WAYPOINT: RMB>BWC>BWR
(2) Bearing signal THS>HDT>HDG>HDM
(3) Speed signal VBW, VHW
・ NMEA2000 input PGN
NMEA2000
Data
PGN Contents
Longitude/Latitude
COG/SOG
Log speed
Heading
Depth
Water Temp
ROT
Rudder
129025
129029
129026
130577
128259
130577
130578
127250
127250
130577
127258
128267
130316
127251
127245
Position, rapid update
GNSS position data
COG and SOG, rapid update
Direction Data
Speed, water referenced
Direction Data
Vessel speed components
Vessel heading
Vessel heading
Direction data
Magnetic variation
Water depth
Temperature extended range
Rate of turn
Rudder
225
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
Data
AIS information
Wind Speed/Direction
Waypoint
Time
Geodic Datum
129795
129796
129797
129798
129800
129801
126983
130306
129283
129284
126992
129033
129044
129045
129802
129803
129804
129805
129806
129807
129809
129810
PGN
129038
129039
129040
129041
129792
129793
129794
NMEA2000
Contents
AIS Class A position report
AIS Class B position report
AIS Class B extended position report
AIS Aids to Navigation (AtoN) report
AIS DGNSS broadcast binary message
AIS UTC and date report
AIS Class A static and voyage related data
AIS addressed binary message
AIS acknowledge
AIS binary broadcast message
AIS SAR aircraft position report
AIS UTC/date Inquiry
AIS addressed safety related message
AIS safety related broadcast message
AIS interrogation
AIS assignment mode command
AIS data link management message
AIS channel management
AIS group assignment
AIS Class B "CS" static data report, Part A
AIS Class B "CS" static data report, Part B
Alert
Wind data
Cross track error
Navigation data
System time
Time and date
Datum
User datum setting
226
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
12.7.2 OUTPUT POSSIBLE SIGNAL
・ NMEA0183 output sentences
(1) Navigation equipment
Radar date: RSD
Own ship’s data: OSD
TT data: TTM, TLL, TTD
Latitude/ Longitude data: GGA, RMC, GNS, GLL,
COG/SOG:
(3) Output RGB signal
・ NMEA2000 output PGN
RMC, VTG (Received GPS data)
Bearing signal: THS, HDT (Received GPS Compass data)
(2) External Buzzer Open collector contacts one port.
(NMEA cable option necessary)
NMEA2000
Data
PGN Contents
Own ship data
Target tracking (TT)
127250
128259
129026
129291
130577
128520
Vessel heading
Speed, water referenced
COG, SOG rapid update
Set and drift, rapid update
Direction data
Tracked target data
12.7.3 STANDARD CONFIGURATION
Scanner: 1unit
Display Unit:
Power cable:
Instruction manual:
1unit
1pc. (3m)
1 book (Including Installation manual and Quick manual)
12.7.4 OPTION CABLE
Installation cable:
Cable length
5m
10m
15m
20m
30m
Cable type
H-CFQ6912-5
H-CFQ6912-10
H-CFQ6912-15
H-CFQ6912-20
H-CFQ6912-30
NMEA cable (waterproof (IPX5)):
Description
CFQ-9002
CFQ-5374
CFQ-7765
Cable type
GPS cable
NMEA0183 cable
NMEA2000 cable
227
FLA T RADIATOR
CTM-122
~--------, .--------~ r---~~ -
r----------------------
lA ( \
"S'
M
0 2COOU.
I
..
X
0
S C OO(JI
""' elf
Ml
7BDR00052
r--------------
NZT-2043
~-------
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
RECIEVE R UNIT
~ ~ --tJ~-----------
A103
,
1
I
: lr-~-,
Fll
A101
'"""
C IRCULATOR fl
F C X 68R
I
: I
1
' :
II
:
~
C MA -..7
L
I f1 r j
I I
A 1 02 E 1 0 1 rt
I I
I I
NJ$6930 I l 1 N JTI0 2 B
I I I
I
I
I
I
'
1 J302 I T\JN E
!
+ 5V
I GHO
4N C
5 1F
NRG2 39
R ECIEVE R C I RCU IT
CAE 548
J301
B MI SB-f'UDSS-TF c<tfX SH)
V I Ol
!'-----'
M SF14 2 1B I 1 1
I 1 - - - - - - -
I
-
~ ~ ~
N f t il;
~ ~ ~
0
~ ~ a
~
=
> ~ ~ t t t
~ ~
= ffi
~
~
' c
~ ~ ~
MODU LA TOR U NIT
INTER C ONNECTION
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
!
0
~ ~ ~
J 201
818 8PUDSSQ.IXSN)
CO MP O UND M OD U LA T O R C I RC UIT
CME 385
J12
S4 B ...£H(LFXSN)
!1: ~ ~ "
§ §§ §
J 13
B28 -PtH<-SCLFXS H )
~
~
J2
D..o.Q
4PS3 T2-SA
J l J3 ts0:2P-tMl..fXSN)
§
~ ~~a~ ~~
P12 Pt3
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -, AiR- 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - , I
WIOI
7ZCRDI658•
F. F.
.
SCANNER UNIT c::::J
I NTERCONNEC TI ON MT I OI
L CAX 22 o= .
.
9 ' lll lii 'T:1 ,_ I .
SC tt . •t::tttltt'f • •
CJ'J ,(-!) ~ :.-
£4
)
SR-1 FM4 .
9X4 .
9 X 6 1
----------------------------------------•
ttfi .
(
OOOO~
ttfl
I
I
:I
I L - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1
I
RADIATOR
~----------,NAX~3~ r-------------------
MO T OR I
CBP-218 r ---------------------------T ~ ~w~uNrr --------------------------,
NZT 2063
1 1-4801M-O
ITIOI~I
PIOI 1-480~~~~-C~
PTIOI 350541 -1 r-----1
1 W3 nCR0165()0o
5101
S11 0
(),)~~
------·
. Q
A 103
FILTER
w----------~
I
V101
: ---------REru
1
I
1 lr~ciivi'"R --,
MPA831187 I
I J A101 ~ ~
CIRCULATOR
N ECTJON
- .
1
.
1
FCX88R r r-,
NJS0930 r,
L___j i
NRG-239
RECIEVER CIRCUIT
CAE-54a
.... 1
B WI IB-PUDSS•
M SF 1422B
I
I
I ,_______
L------------
"'j-<
>-
~~~-~~~-?
IMODULATOR UN I T
INTERCON N EC TI O N
CNM 260
~
L-----
j
. -
Tl01 •1 5
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i
~ ~ i j i i i i
~
I
I
P11
"'
,. rt , .
Jt> fW8-a(l.FXSN)
..
1 vco liP
.
..,
TJO I • II
COMPOUND MODULAT O R CIRClAT
C ME-386 A
J201
111 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J11
B3P-VIKLf'XSN) t-:: : : := i d
J40 1
B48-9H-K -s( u:)(SN )
J14
8 28-E H(LF)(S N ) H ~ ~ nh
!l w
J12
828--PH-K •t(l.FXSH) lij
~
....
JO
3.50201-1 150201-1
:1. :i :1. :i
J2
L...,_._
MTHA
~! H
J 1
....
-
~ ~ w n s
'"
.
:!
· :'!!:
P12
· - •PHit-1
"' I : I
L~ ~~~~~~~~~~~ l -----------------------------------
L
1
I
INTE
-ffi~
I
€Tl
rr~
· ··
I I =
M T10 1
__________________________________________________________
I
I
I
:
0 '1?
J~o.
a• tt.
•a t Q()()()Utt.
tt e att
. .utt•tt• • ,,c _..;.
;.;£• )
9 ~ ·1117'--?,11.. 1.50
r------------------------,
HIGH SPEED M OTOR
CBP-169
RAD IAT OR
NAX-434
~----------~ r----------~
.----------------
---------r AANs~~~u~ ---------------------------------,
NZT 201!3
J 4
831'-11\H
M D I
HIGH SPEED M O T OR
DRIVE CIRC UIT
TD 1 2900-2 44
Jl
BIOP-SHF IANJI)
!
~ ~
~ § J
! ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ !
Jl
Btp-SHF-1M(LF)
J3
112P vtH> g g
,J13 r
-----------
V I Ol
M SFI 4 22B i
----- --- --
R ECIEvE R-UNIT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
--c;-__
Mro
FILTER
M P A831167
:J
__________
r
L___j
I
1
:
:
:
I
1
I
I lr~~ -~
I I
UNIT
1
JAio i L~
CIRCU LAT OR r l
NJ S6930 r,
I I rmROOH1
I 1
NE CllOH
1
I 1
CMA-tt7 I
1
FCX68R
N RG-239
REC IEVER C IR CUIT
CAE-543
....
.
BM i e-P\OS S lRXI.FX5K)
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
I
I i
~ -
______
~
P>D l
3_ M ODU LAT OR U NIT
INTERCONNECTION
CNM-266
rrr ur
I:'ff:l-'t-
~=
~ . J
L----
~ ~ ~
' I i i : i
~ i ~ I i i i i
~
T :JO I-1 8
BAB-Et(LF):S trU
T301-15
QI IVCC
.1201
8118-f'UOSS(LfXSN)
~ ~
JI03
8 108 -PH-1(S(Lf'XSH)
J501
EMIJ ptt-K S(U:XSN) ii wiHH it
~ ~ t; t:i
2 i j
.....
B2P-vt(L.f)(S!
t }
HIGH SPEED M O T OR
CONTROL CIRCUIT
CCB-665
"""
·1
J401
.............C
-5(\J')(SN)
Jl4
828 -EKl.FXSN)
COMPOUND MODUI.A
C ME -38 6 A
J l!
020 PH K -Sd.FX
SH )
J4 JS
~~~·
J2
IL~T l'-6A
Jl
IL Tl-SA
J3
B02P-HVQ..I'XSN)
.,.
, -19 9 9 9 9 9
I r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I MOTOR U NIT
S I0 2
NRS -1 0 2 70F r - - -
P1 2
I
:
~-------------------------------------~
L - - ·
I
I c:::J
MTIOI :
SR-I FM4 .
9X4 .
9X6 I
I INTERCONNECTION
I CFS1
J IOI
,.....,.
,.
-<> I
L------------------
1
0
I
I
L
.wz
I
I 7ZC RD164!1* I
I
SCA NN ER UNIT
INTERC O NN ECTION
I
:
CAX 23 I
I
I
I
I
~
T-:1: • •tt•• ( ooooutt wa• 4
.utt
tttt•UP (......-t""~t 4 >
~ · · ~-:1Ao UO
r--------------------------:r-L---------------r~~rrnw A~E w~uMiNu~2~;------r~swnE~~c~R~rr---------------,
MAGNETRON
N~2
LdiuMiJ
~Fll TE ~ f ...... .__ ..................................................................
: RECEJVERUN I T
~~ ~~-~~~ ~~~~ ~~~~
NRG -6 10 A
........................... ••.•. :
I
VIOl
30 • EtOt
MAft515N
~
(RECEIVER UNIT INTERCONNECTION CMA 823)
,J; s .
o.
-::I:"
I
I
I
CIRCUIT t~xs
YEL!ZSJ GRN
I
~
CFR · 212
MAG Flll E R f
A t
U
WVI01
). fO
· ..
..
~ , li ~
( )
FCX81
(W204)
ZCR01312•
J
!
v
I
-'
: o:
:
!
:
, , _
~·IV
:;:
$IF'
I
U01 · U
U01 · 1 1
~xi!'
-
~ g
··--········ · · ······· ·· 000000000000000
~[IJ.l1lllllJ
I .. lll II
If AMP CIRCUIT ( PC 30 1)
CAE -529 A-1
(
~ h~ ~~n
.
...
.....
.
.
....
... .
Sf i
~K
!~
I
I
1
POWER
SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
( PCIOOI )
CB D 2 783
101
OI• II V
0 t• Uv
O J •tv
0'""""
0 l .l
U
QJXI
0 HV
0 ''" l U.
10-""'l.R
MODULATOR CIRCUIT
(P C201)
CME-363 A
..
~
J
...
(WOO$)
(fZCI!Ot:I02 llf
~
lfl"•
l_B!
(W007l
ZCRD 131>1!1 r-- • --------------------------..
: BREAK ClRCU1T CFA-252
~
.~,m,..,wr ----~~~---------------,
'
[j;~~ == :tt::tgJ ·~
:
L------
:·:·:.::·:.::.::·:·:.::::·:.::.::.::.:; r·· · ··· · ·· ··· ·· · ·· · ·· · · ·· ··· ·· · ··· · ·· · ·· ·:
I
:I t~
!NC
,_~
: I
: I
~=:jil ; =:
) N¢
M OTOR CONTROL
POWER CIRCUIT "'05 ( PCI~I) ~~ t:3c::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~~
C8D-1l19
JA(H)
:~
I
BIOI
H · 780~8
D ISPLAY
UNIT M O T O R CBP-202
--
-----
----
-.--------
-----
-----
---
---·
S C ANNER U NIT I NTERCONNECTI O N
C AX-10
05002tfl-H15J05
USB/SO I /F CIRCUIT
CYi-2SlS
C1~1
LCD Module
15
I
1
I
Cll2
05002tfl-H
15
J05
KEYBOARD CIRCUIT
CCK 1141
Ct1
3
53261-<l271
I
SP1
E3::::::::!l:J
SCANNER INTERFACE CIRCUIT
CI.H
-
3
2513
B6PS-VH
CN1
526B 02A
CN2
12505WS-<l6 j
CIIS
0
°o~dj
SCANNER
00°
I ..
C N 2 1 ! 1 C N 1 5
91 209-<l 1011-<l01
1 1
CN
1 0500
2tfl-H50J05
:(1:(1):1:1:1:(1: 1:(1) :(1:1:(1):1:1m:~:~:~m:~:~:~:~:~:~:~:~):l:l: l) :(l:l:l:l:~
_j
U23BS55
1 6
-~-~l_ _j
,:.,~ ~!
.
~51:/S-{)6 . ~0
0
1 1
1 2505VIS10
Ct16 05002H'l-H50J05
Cl15
CB745021.1100
1
1
Clll
CH75502M100
CIIB
0 o
0
NMEA2000
CU
LTV.~D-OOP
2 1 w
OPS
1:·
~::~
CN3
,
I
~1 Cll2
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
NI.EA0183 LTVSD-10P
F I-SEB20P-IfE 12505 \'IS14 CMH 2512
CML 872
(600*800)
TT PROCESS
CIRCUIT CDC 1498
Cl~1
05005HS-H60J 1
~ 60
60.
, I
CIH
1 2505WS-<l B
~10
05005HS -H60 J 1
1
PROCESS C I RCU I T
CDC-1497
1
CN4
LTVSD-10P
~ ~oo
00000 I
NMEA_ALARU
Cl15
LPJE6890 tl l
i___Qj
LAN
~
~
~0~
OVI
5~
I
CB3 1 7-<l4AFss~ l
~~usa
POWER SUPPLY
1
I
~
CIRCUIT CBD -202 8
"""'""""'"
Cl · l1
84P-VH
1
POWER SUPPLY
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
1 •
CMH-2514
~--""
I
CN1
~o
0 DC IN o o
I
"w
'
""
+12V IIIII
RY1
I' e r e t '
I ~
F1 10A
I
DC24V
DC I NPI.JT
L
DCOV(
J---7---------'
F2 SA
SCANNER
1AJ
2A MOOULA TOA t.l.JL T I
DC DC
U4
:+3 . 3V_AL I VE
:: +1.8V_ALIVE
"" +1.0V_ALIVE
:+1. 1V_COAE
:: +1.0V_COAE
:::: +3.3V_SYS
CPU
::. +1.8V_SYS
:: +1 .
5V_CPU
"" + 1. 5V _DOR OOR IIEI.t<JlY
: JuoTOA
ISOLATION
MULTI
AVR
T1.U5
t----+<J
::J
EXTERNAL
~-------------------------~+ 5V +5V
1 ----1:~
+1.2V J
+ 1 . 8V FPGA
1 - - ·
----1-~ +2 . 5V
§
J
+3.3V :~ : ~~ ~
+1 .
1V
+1 .
0V
+0 .
75V
L--------j ~
Analog
I '
1
POWER BOARD
• +12V
•
A+5V
Analog
A+5V ...
Analog
A-5V ...
Analog
CPU 1/0 HIGH ON
10K
1111~---------.
FRONT PANEL
I
I
VIDEO
I
U18.U19.U23
I
' • +3.3V On£R IC
LCO +3.3V
+12V ...
+ 12V 4
+12V 0.5A
POL YFUSE
0
LCO +l'N
I
0
KEY BACKLI GIT
I
REAR GPS
I
REAR fQt I
+5V 0.5A
POL YFUSE
+5V 0.5A
POL YFUSE
U6
I
I
REAR usa usa
NMEA2000
CFQ-7765 (OPTION) -
JRC GPS Cc:;F...:0:_·900=2"-'-=(0::_P.:.
I:.::D.:.:N,_) - - - ,
N C D2364 D IS PLA Y UN I T
SHIELD
NET -C(V -
NET H
NET l
NMEA2000
CN8 ( HM C-05PMM P-SFB001)
GNO
1
2
3
V+IN
VI N
4
5
CAN-H
CAN l
REO mJS...
W H T ill!!:!
~
BRN
GPS
CN2 ( l TWB0-06P)
+12V
GND
RXD-
RXD+
TXO+
TXO-
NMEA0183 CF0-5374 (O PTION)
•12 p in connec tor r
--------------------:
BRN , REO , ORG, VEL. GRN,
BLU . PUR, GRY , WHT
PNK
'
'
'
' '
'
'
'
'
(~ ~~e~:_ ~e-~·~k_·~~ ~~ ~~
!!!lli
RED
ORG
VEL
GRN
BLU
PUR
WHT
BLK
NMEA0183
CN3 ( L TWBD -1 0P)
NMEA1 RX + (A)
NMEA1 RX (B)
NMEA1 TX+ ( A )
NMEA1 TX-(B )
NMEA2 RX + (A)
NMEA2 RX- ( B)
NMEA2 TX+ (A )
NMEA2 T X (B)
GND
10 I SHIELD
NMEA01 83 CFQ-5374 (OPT I ON)
• 12 pin co nnect or
r ----------------------
:
BRN , R E O , ORG , VE L , GRN .
~;_---,
BLU , PUR , GRY, WHT
/
PNK
---
'
'~~~~ !._t~~~ · ~-·~ ~ ~~"'!~ !_1'~ _:
BRN
~
ORG
VEL
GRN
BLU
PUR
QB.'t
'::!:!!:iT
BLK
NMEAALARM
CN4 ( L TWBD1 0P)
NMEA3 RX+ (A)
NMEA3 RX- (B)
NMEA3 TX+ (A)
NMEA3 TX- (B )
EVENT+
~
AL-COM
AL NO
10
GND
I
SHIEL D
1 3
14
1 5
16
8
9
1 0
11
1 2
SCANNER
CN9 (SOC -2516P)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M·
BLU .
T / GRY .
T
M-
PUR.TISRN
.
T
M+
W HT .
T /O RN .
M+
REO .
T /G RN .
T
BLK.
TIS KY .T
2A
GND
VID E O GND (VD E )
BLK
+12V
1A
VIDEO (V D )
D T
A
""'
R$485+ ( MTR+ )
HEADING (BZ)
VEL
GRN
WHT
RS-485· (MTR·)
TRIG GND (TRGE) ~
TRIGGER (TRG)
BEARING (B P )
ORN
19CO RES CABLE (OPTION)
CFQ-69 1251 10115120130
Cable length limitati ons
MAX 20m ( DC12V )
MAX 30m ( D C2 4V )
LAN
CNS (LPJE6890 NL)
D V I (DVI · D )
(DVI-SDNH-24 +1 -LF)
I
TI.
()S_DA2-
TI()SJ)A2+
Tt.DS.2
/ 4 _ SH
Tl()SJ)Al -
10 1 Tt.
D S J)Al+
1 / 3_5H
TI()SJW)-
TillS_ll,IO+
TlDS_0 / 5_5H nos_a..Kno s_a..K
+
Tt.DS
_ Cl..K_Sti
~~
POOEFLSV flOIIel.(N)
~ ~ a.cxx
OClCJ)ATA
SVGA (800•600 pix ce l )
Vertical mon ito r
DC IN
CN1 (L TWDC..SP)
I
+ 2 4V
I
+24V ov ov
EARTH
CHART CARD
CN2 ( AXA2R7 306 1)
[QJ new pec/Navionlcs+
C H ART CARD SLOT
( FRONT SIDE)
USB
C N 3 ( C83 17-04AFS S WOR )
U SB2 .
0 P ORT
(FRONT SIDE)
S H IPS MAINS
DC12V /2 4 V ( + 30%/-10%)
CFQ 7758
(3m JRC SUPPLY)
J1
1 : _
2
,-2!lli--
3
ETIYE
EXBP
4 EXBPE
~
EXBZ t 9
10
J2 vo
VOE
NKE-204 3 SCANNER UN I T
BLK .
T / S KY .
T
YEL.TIPNK.T
1
2
J3
2A
1A
USB2 .
0 P ORT
(REAR S I DE)
NMEA2000 C::;F 0 :_: c:_ ::: :..> .::: T O N l _
J RC GPS C ·900 2 :_ :: oc _ _ _
SHIEL D
NET-SlY•
NET-C(V-'
!:!lli
NET-l
NCD-2364 DISPLAY UN I T
N MEA2000
CN8 (HMC-05PMMP-S F 8001) ----
GND
V•l N
V IN
CAN-H
CAN-L
GPS
CN2 (L
+ 12V
GND
RXD-
RXD+
11
12
13
14
15
16
SCANNER
CN9 (SOC-251 6P)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M·
M·
BLU .
T /GRY .
T
PUR.TIBRN.T
WHT .
T / ORN .
M+
M+
RED .
T /G RN .
T
BL K.T/SKY.T
2A
G ND
VIDEO GND (VDE)
BLK
8
9
1 0
+ 1 2V
1A
V IDEO (VD)
I
ELT
YEL
IP Nl T
.A v
RS485+ (M TR+ )
HEADING (BZ)
RS-485(MTR-)
GRN
WHT
T RIG GND (TRGE) t=:::l,_
T RIGGER (TRG)
BEARING (BP)
ORN
NMEA0183 CFQ-537 4 (OPTION) r
• 12 pin connector
'
'
BRN, REO, ORG, VEL , GRN,
BLU , PUR, GRY , WHT
P NK
(Unused)
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
NMEA 0183
CN3(LTWBD-10P)
1
2
NMEA1 RX+ (A)
NMEA1 RX· ( B )
NMEA 1 TX+ (A)
NMEA1 TX (B)
NMEA2 RX+ (A)
NMEA2 RX· (B)
NMEA2 T X+ (A)
NMEA2 TX· (8)
GND
SHIELD
LAN
CN S (LPJ E 689 DNL)
D VI (OVI-D)
CN6 ( D VI.SDNH-24+1-LF)
:
NMEA 0 183 CF0-5374 (OPTION)
• 12 pin conn ect or r----------------------
:
'
BRN, REO, ORG, VEL, GR N ,
BLU , PUR , GRY , WHT
:
'
PNK
:
'
_
~ ~ ·~ ~ ~~~-~ _ I
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
NMEA ALARM
CN4 (LTWS0-10P)
NMEA3 RX+ (A}
NMEA3 RX· ( 8 )
NMEA3 TX+ ( A )
NMEA3 TX- (B)
EVENT~
EVENT -
AL -CO t.t
AL -N O
GND
S HIELD
SH I PS MAINS
[JMA -3406 ]
DC1 2V/24V (+30%/-10%)
[JMA -3406 HS]
DC2 4V ( + 30%/-10% )
CF0-7758
(3m JRC SUPPLY)
DC IN
CN 1 (L · SP)
+24V
+2 4 V ov ov
EARTH
19-CORES CABLE (OPTION)
CF0~912·5110115120130
Cab4e length li mitations
( JMA -3406 (
MAX 20m (DC 1 2V)
MAX 30m (DC2 4V )
(J MA 3406HS)
MAX 30m (DC2 4 V)
SVGA (800•600 pb:cel)
Vertica l monitor
CHART CARD
CN2 (AXA2R73061)
[Q] llew pedNavionics•
C H ART CARD SLOT
(FRONT SIDE)
USB
CN3 (C8317-04AFSSWOR)
US82 .
0 PORT
( FRONT S IDE )
US8 2.0 PORT
(REAR SIDE)
NKE-2063AIHS SCANNER UNIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
J 1
ETIY
ETIYE
EXBP
EXBPE
EXBZ
EXBZE
J2
VD
VDE
COM+
COM-
BLK .
T ISKY .
T
YEL.
T IPNK.
T
J3
I ( 2A
2 ( 1A
BLU .
T /GRY.
T
WHT .
TIORN .
T
1
2
J4
M -
I
M•
PUR.TIBRN
.
T
RED.T
/G RN.T
1
2
J5
I
M-
I
M •
[
I
I
I
I
FG
NCD-2364 D ISPLAY UNIT
N M E A2000
CFQn 65 (OPT I O N )
~ ~~
NET-9Y:J.
N ET ·H
N ETL
3
4
1
2
NMEA2000
CN8 ( H MC.OSPM
M '..SF8001)
5
GN D
V+IN
V -I N
CAN-H
CAN·L
J RCG P S
C F 0-9002 (OP TI O N )
~
R ED
BL K
N MEA0 1 83 CF Q -537 4 (OPTION)
• 12p incor'~Me tor r---------------------
BRN, REO , ORG, YEL, GRN,
BLU , PUR , GRY , WHT
(U n used)
P NK r
WH T
G R N
VE L
B R N
3
4
1
2
5
6
GPS
CN2 ( L TWBD-06P)
+12V
GND
RXD·
RX D
TXD
+
+
TXD-
NMEA0183
C N 3 ( LTWBD-10P)
NMEA1 RX + (A)
NMEA1 R.X-(8)
NMEA1 TX+ (A)
NMEA 1 TX(B)
3
4
1
2
10
11
12
1 3
5
6
1
8
9
14
15
16
SCANNER
CN9 (SOC-251 6P)
M·
M·
M+
BLU.
T /G R Y .
T
PUR.
T IBRN .
T
WHT .
T /O R N .
M +
R ED .T
/ GRN .
T
BLK.TISKY
.
T
2A
G N D
BLK
1 A
VIDEO GNO (VOE)
+12V
Ct
A
V I DEO(VO)
VE L v
RS485+ { M TR+)
GRN
H EADING (BZ )
WHT
RS-485- (MTR -)
T RIG GNO (TRG E )
T RIGG E R (TRG)
~
ORN
BEARING (BP)
1 9-CORES CABLE (OPT I ON)
CF~912 51 1 0115120130
LAN
CN5 ( LP JE6890NL)
N K E-210 3 -4 / 4HS /6/6 HS SCANNER UNIT
J 1
~ ETIY
AGND
~
EXBP
4 AGND
~
EXBZ
,J!b!L-
6 AGND t
9
1 0
J2
VD
VDE
~
COM-
BLK.TISKY
.
T
Y EL.
TJPNK .T
1
2
J3
2A
1 A
BLU .
T I GRY .
T
WHT .
TIO RN .
T
J4
1_l 2A
2 I 1A
PUR .
T IBRN.T
R EO .
T IG R N .
T
1
2
J5
2A
1 A
I
I
FG
OVI( O V I 0 )
CN6 (DVI-SDNH-2 4 +1-LF )
NMEA0183 C F0 -537 4 (OPTION)
• 12 pin connector r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - :
B RN , R ED , ORG, Y E L , G RN , m
BLU. PUR. GRY . W H T
P NK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
__ (~~~-b!'~-~~~-~!.'~_ :
:
I
I
:
SHIPS MAINS cF0-1758
DC24V (+ 3 0 %/10 % )
( 3mJRCSUPPLV)
~
B RN
R ED
ORG
5
8
9
6
1
1 0
2
3
4
NMEAALARM
CN4 ( L TWBD-10P)
1 NMEA3 RX + (A)
NMEA3 RX· (8)
NMEA3 TX+ (A)
N MEA3 TX{B)
EVENT•
EVENT-
Al-COM
AL-NO
GND
SH I ELD
OCIN
CN 1 (LTWOC-5P)
I
+ 24V
I
+ 24V ov
OV
EAR T H
Vertical monitor
CHART CARD
CN2 (AXA2R73061)
[Q] new peciNavion ics +
CHART CARD SLOT
(FRONT SIDE)
US B
CN3 (C8317-04AFSSWOR)
US82 .
0PORT
( F RON T S ID E )
USB2 .
0 POR T
{REAR SIDE)
(MEMO)
APPENDIX
A-10
APPENDIX
MENU FUNCTION LIST
Item
1. User
1. USER1 short press
2. USER2 short press
3. USER1 long press
4. USER2 long press
2. RADAR Echo
1. Pulse Width
2. IR
3. Target Enhance
4. Process
5. Zoom Mode
6. Video Noise Rejection
7. Video Latitude
3.Tune
4. Marker
1. EBL1 Setting
1. Floating
2.Bearing Mode
2. EBL2 Setting
1. Floating
2. Bearing Mode
3. Parallel Cursor
1. Range Scale Link
2. Floating
3. Bearing Mode
4. One / Both Sides
5. Display For Individual Line1
6. Display For Individual Line2
7. Display For Individual Line3
8. Display For Individual Line 4
9. Display For Individual Line5
10. Display For Individual Line 6
11. Display For Individual Line 7
4. VRM Unit
5. Cursor Mode
1.Bearing Mode
2.Unit
3.Size
4.Pattem
6. Range Ring
5. Set Own Ship Movement
1. TM/RM
2. Bearing Mode
6. Trails
1. Threshold
2. Time/All Combine
Main Menu
Setting Contents
Release / Cancel
Release / Cancel
Release / Cancel
Release / Cancel
SP1 / SP2 / MP1 / MP2 / LP1 / LP2 / LP3
OFF / Low / Middle / High
OFF / Leve1 / Level2 / Level3
OFF / 3Scan CORREL / 4Scan CORREL / 5Scan CORREL / Remain / Peak
Hold
OFF / Zoom x2 / Zoom Circle
OFF / Level1 / Level2 / Level3
Narrow / Normal / Wide1 / Wide2 / Max
Manual / Auto
Off / Screen Fix / Lat/Lon Fix
True / Relative
Off / Screen Fix / Lat/Lon Fix
True / Relative
Off / On
Off / Screen Fix / Lat/Lon Fix
Angle Fix / Screen Fix / Heading Fix
One Side / Both Sides
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
NM / km / sm / Link Range
True / Relative
NM / km / sm / Link Range
Small / Large
Thin Cross / Thin Cross(Empty on Center) / Thick Cross / Thick Cross(Empty on Center)
Off / On
RM / TM
Head Up / North Up / Course Up / Course Up Reset
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Off / On
A-11
Item
3. Trails Mode
7. Vector
1. Vector Mode
2. Display Own Ship ’s Vector
3. Own Ship Vector Line Width
8. Offcenter
1. Set Position
2. Remove
9. Function Setting
1. Standard
1. Function Enable/Disable
2. IR
3. Process
4. Target Enhance
5. AUTO STC/FTC
6. Video Latitude
7. Video Noise Rejection
8. Trails Interval
9. Trails Mode
10. Threshold
11. Time/All Combine
12. MAX Interval
13. PRF
14. Antenna Height
15. Save Present State
16. Initialize
2. Coast
3. Deepsea
4. Fishnet
5. Bird
6. User
10. AIS / TT
1. TT Function On/Off
2. AIS Function On/Off
3. CPA Limit
4. TCPA Limit
5. CPA Ring
6. TT Target Number Display
7. AIS Target Number Display
8. Target Number Allocation
1. TT
2. AIS
9. TLL Target Number Allocation
1. Allocation
2. Own Ship ’ s
APPENDIX
Setting Contents
True / Relative
True / Relative
Off / On
1 ~ 5
Off / On
OFF / Low / Middle / High
OFF / 3Scan CORREL / 4Scan CORREL / 5Scan CORREL / Remain / Peak
Hold
OFF / Level1 / Level2 / Level3
OFF / AUTO STC / AUTO FTC / AUTO STC + AUTO FTC
Narrow / Normal / Wide1 / Wide2 / MAX
OFF / Level1 / Level2 / Level3
Short : OFF / 15sec / 30sec / 1min / 2min / 3min / 4min / 5min / 6min / 10min /
15min / Continuous
Middle : OFF / 30sec / 1min / 2min / 3min / 4min / 5min / 6min / 10min / 15min /
30min / Continuous
Long : OFF / 1min / 2min / 3min / 4min / 5min / 6min / 10min / 15min / 30min /
1time / Continuous
Super long : OFF / 30min / 1time / 2time / 3time / 4time / 5time / 6time / 10time /
12time / 24time / Continuous
True / Relative
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
OFF / ON
Short / Middle / Long / Super Long
Normal / Economy / High Power
-5m / 5-10m / 10-20m / 20m - / USER
Same setting as standard
Same setting as standard
Same setting as standard
Same setting as standard
Same setting as standard
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
0.0
~ 9.9NM
0 ~ 99min
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
00 ~ 70
00 ~ 900
Own Ship ’ s / Cursor
00 ~ 99
A-12
APPENDIX
Item
3. Cursor
10. ALR Alarm From AIS
11. AIS Display Target
12. AIS Destination Ship
13. AIS Retrieved Vessel
1. AIS Retrieved Vessel #1
2. AIS Retrieved Vessel #2
3. AIS Retrieved Vessel #3
4. AIS Retrieved Vessel #4
5. AIS Retrieved Vessel #5
6. AIS Retrieved Vessel #6
7. AIS Retrieved Vessel #7
8. AIS Retrieved Vessel #8
9. AIS Retrieved Vessel #9
10. AIS Retrieved Vessel #10
14. AIS Filter
11. Guard Zone
1. Zone1 Alarm Level
2. Zone1 Alarm Mode
3. Make Zone1
4. Zone2 Alarm Level
5. Zone2 Alarm Mode
6. Make Zone2
12. Waypoint Display
13. Chart
1. Type
2. Display
3. Symbol
1. Lat/Lon grid
2. Depth Grid
3. Lighthouse
4. Buoy
5. Wreck Ship
6. Fish Haven
7. Sea Lane
8. Restricted Area
9. Fishing Area
10. Sea Cable
11. Name
12. Mark Attribute
13. etc.
4. Palette
5. Show extend Data
14. Set Chart Operation
1. Set Operation
2. Delete Map Temporarily
3. Delete Echo Temporarily
15. Mark
1. Mark Size
A-13
Setting Contents
00 ~ 99
Off / On
10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60 / 70 / 80 / 90 / 100
000000000 ~ 999999999
000000000 ~ 999999999
000000000 ~ 999999999
000000000 ~ 999999999
000000000 ~ 999999999
000000000 ~ 999999999
000000000 ~ 999999999
000000000 ~ 999999999
000000000 ~ 999999999
000000000 ~ 999999999
000000000 ~ 999999999
0.0 ~ 72.0NM
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
OFF / Display / In / Out / Auto TT
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
OFF / Display / In / Out
Off / On new pec / Navionics+
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Day / Night
Off / On
Delete while pressing / Press once, delete mutual / Press 1 time, recover 8 seconds later
When selected, the function is executed according to the execution operation setting.
When selected, the function is executed according to the execution operation setting.
Small / Large
Item
2. Mark Color
3. Mark Type
4. Display Mark Color
1. All
2. White
3. Cyan
4. Blue
5. Green
6. Yellow
7. Pink
8. Red
5. Display Mark Type
1. All
2. ×
3. +
4. Y
5.
6. Mark List
16. Ownship Mark
1. Own Ship Position Mark Size
2. Own Ship Position Mark Color
3. Own Ship Position Mark Type
4. Display Mark Type
1. All
2. White
3. Cyan
4. Blue
5. Green
6. Yellow
7. Pink
8. Red
5. Display Mark Type
1. All
2. ×
3. +
4. Y
5.
6. Own Ship Position Mark List
17. Line
1. Line Color
2. Line Type
3. Display Line Color
1. All
2. White
3. Cyan
4. Blue
5. Green
6. Yellow
7. Pink
8. Red
4. Display Line Type
Setting Contents
White / Cyan / Blue / Green / Yellow / Pink / Red
× / + / Y /
All / Individual
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
All / Individual
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Small / Large
White / Cyan / Blue / Green / Yellow / Pink / Red
× / + / Y /
All / Individual
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
All / Individual
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Mark list screen display
White / Cyan / Blue / Green / Yellow / Pink / Red
Solid Line / Dashed Line(Short) / Dashed Line(Long)
All / Individual
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
APPENDIX
A-14
APPENDIX
Item
1. All
2. Solid Line
3. Dashed Line(Short)
4. Dashed Line(Long)
5. Line List
18. Own Track
1. Own Track Record On/Off
2. Own Track Record Display On/Off
3. Own Track Color
4. Own Track Type
5. Own Track Interval
6. Display Own Track Color
1. All
2. White
3. Cyan
4. Blue
5. Green
6. Yellow
7. Pink
8. Red
7. Display Own Track Color
1. All
2. Solid Line
3. Dashed Line(Short)
4. Dashed Line(Long)
8. Clear Own Track Color/Type
1. Clear Own Track Color
2. Clear Own Track Type
3. Clear Own Track
19. File Operation
1. Save
1. Mark/Line
2. Own Ship Track
2. Load
1. Mark/Line
2. Own Ship Track
3. Delete
1. Mark/Line
2. Own Ship Track
20.Screen Capture
1. Capture Function
2. Set Manual Key
3. Interval
21.Timed TX
1. Timed TX
2. TX Time
3. Standby Time
22. TLL TX "USER2"
23. Certification Information
Setting Contents
All / Individual
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Mark list screen display
Off / On
Off / On
White / Cyan / Blue / Green / Yellow / Pink / Red
Solid Line / Dashed Line(Short) / Dashed Line(Long)
3Seconds / 5Seconds / 10Seconds / 30Seconds / 1Minutes / 3Minutes /
5Minutes / 10Minutes / 30Minutes / 60Minutes / 1NM / 3NM / 5NM / 10NM
All / Individual
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
All / Individual
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
All / White / Cyan / Blue / Green / Yellow / Pink / Red
All / Solid Line / Dashed Line(Short) / Dashed Line(Long)
OFF / Manual / Auto
USER1 / USER2
10 ~ 999
Off / On
1 ~ 99 Scan
1 ~ 99 min
Off / On
A-15
Adjust Menu
Item Setting Contents
1. Basic Adjustment
1. Bearing Adjustment
2. Range Adjustment
3. Tune Adjustment
4. Antenna Height
5. Language
2. RADAR Echo
1. Noise Level
2. Main Bang Suppression
1. Main Bang Suppression Area
2. Main Bang Suppression Slope
3. Main Bang Suppression Level
3. Target Enhance Level
4. Gain
1. Preset
5. Sea
1. STC Curve Select
2. STC Slope Correction
3. STC Offset
6. Rain
1. FTC Curve Select
2. FTC Slope Correction
3. FTC Offset
3. Trails
1.
Trails Suppression Distance
2. Max Interval
3. Range Limit
0.0 - 359.9
°
0 - 999
0 - 127
~5m / 5~10m / 10~20m / 20m~ / USER
English / Japanese / Language3 / Language4 / Language5 / ---- /
Language19 / Language20 / Custom
0 – 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
0 – 255
Sea / River
0.0 - 2.0
0 – 9, A - F
Sea / River
0.0 - 2.0
0 – 9, A - F
0 - 1000
Short / Middle / Long / Super Long
No Limit / Under 2 Range / Under 3 Range / Under 4 Range
1 – 8
Off / On
0 - 64
4. TT
1. Vector Constant
2. Gate Display
3. Gate Size
5. Scanner
1. Slope Correction
2. PRF Fine Tuning
3. Stagger Trigger
4. Scanner Rotation Speed
1.
SP1
2.
SP2
3. SP3
4. MP1
5. MP2
6. LP1
7. LP2
5. PRF Output Mode
0 - 31
Off / On
0 - 7
0 - 7
0 - 7
0 - 7
0 - 7
0 - 7
0 - 7
Normal / Economy / High Power
6. Safety Switch
7. Tune Peak Adjustment
8. Tune Indicator Level Adjustment
9. Stop antenna in the specified direction
TX-Off / Standby / TX-On / Ignore Error
0 – 127
0 – 127
1. ON/OFF
2. Angle
Off / On
0 – 360
10. Ice Class Standby Mode
6. I/F Device
1. Heading Equipment
Off / On
AUTO / GYRO/Compass / GPS / Manual
APPENDIX
A-16
APPENDIX
Item
2. Manual Heading
3. Speed Equipment
4. Manual Speed
5. MAG Compass Setting
1. Heading Correction
2. Correct Value
5. Wind
1. MWV
2. VWT
3. VWR
6. WPT
1. RMB
2. BWC
3. BWR
3. Rx Port
1. GYRO
2. Compass
3. GPS
4. Log
5. 2Log
6. Depth
7. Temperature
8. Wind
9. WPT
10. Rate of Tum
11. Rudder
4. Tx Port
7. COM Port Setting
1. Baud Rate
1. GPS
2. NMEA1
3. NMEA2
4. NMEA3
2. Rx Sentence
1. GPS ( Lat / Lon )
1. GGA
2. RMC
3. RMA
4. GNS
5. GLL
2. GPS ( COG / SOG )
1. RMC
2. RMA
3. VTG
3. Heading
1. THS
2. HDT
3. HDG
4. HDM
5. VHW
4. Depth
1. DPT
2. DBS
3. DBT
4. DBK
A-17
Setting Contents
0.0 - 359.9
°
GPS / Log/2Log / Manual
0.0 - 100.0 kn
Off / On
W9.9° - E9.9°
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Auto / 4800bps / 38400bps
Auto / 4800bps / 38400bps
Auto / 4800bps / 38400bps
Auto / 4800bps / 38400bps
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Auto / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Item
1. TTM
2. TLL
3. TTD
4. TLB
5. GGA
6. GLL
7. RMC
8. VTG
9. OSD
10. RSD
11. THS
12. HDT
5. TX Data Format
1. TX Interval
2. NMEA Version
3. NMEA Talker
6. Target Information TX
1. TX Target
2. TTM Distance Accuracy
3. TTM Average Mode
4. TTM Average Scan
8. Buzzer
1. Key ACK
2. Operation Error
3. CPA/TCPA
4. AZ/Alarm Zone
5. Target Lost
6. System Alarm
7. External
1. CPA/TCPA
2. AZ/Alarm Zone
3. Target Lost
4. System Alarm
5. Out of Range
9. GPS
1. NMEA Version
2. GPS Setting
1. Correction Method
2. Fix Mode
3. Elevate Mask
4. HDOP
5. Smooth Lat/Lon
6. Smooth SOG
7. Smooth COG
8. Smoothing1
9. Smoothing2
10. RAIM Accuracy Level
11. Exclusion Satellite
1. Exclusion Satellite 1
2. Exclusion Satellite 2
3. Exclusion Satellite 3
4. Exclusion Satellite 4
5. Exclusion Satellite 5
6. Exclusion Satellite 6
12. Send Data
Setting Contents
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
Off / NMEA2000 / GPS / NMEA1 / NMEA2 / NMEA3
1 – 9 second
V2.3 / V2.0 / V1.5
Normal / GP
TT / AIS / TT/AIS
1 / 2 / 3
Off / On
2 - 10
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Auto / V1.5 / V2.1 / V2.3
GPS Single / SBAS / Beacon / AUTO
2D / 3D / AUTO
5 - 89 °
4 / 10 / 20
0 – 99 sec(R34.00 - )
0 – 99 sec(R34.00 - )
0 – 99 sec(R34.00 - )
0 – 99 sec(R29.04 - R33.99)
1 – 99 sec(R26.01 - R29.03)
0 sec / 10 sec / 40 sec( - R26.00)
Off / 10m / 30m / 50m / 100m
0 – 32
0 – 32
0 – 32
0 – 32
0 – 32
0 – 32
APPENDIX
A-18
APPENDIX
Item
13. GPS Adjust
1. Position
1. Latitude
2. Longitude
2. Antenna Height
3. Time
4. Date
5. Master Reset
6. Send Data
3. Beacon Setting
1. Select
2. Frequency
3. Baud Rate
4. Send Data
4.SBAS Setting
1. Satellite Search
2. Type0 Information
3. Ranging
4. SBAS Satellite Number
5. Send Data
5. Display GPS Receive Status
6. LORAN Setting
1. Display Time Zone
2. LORAN A
1. Select 1
2. Select 2
3. TD1 Correction
4. TD2 Correction
3. LORAN C
1. Chain
2. TD1
3. TD2
4. TD1 Correction
5. TD2 Correction
10. Control
1. Multi Control Menu Time Out
2. Cross Key Gain
3. Trackball Control
4. Multi Control
1. EBL
2. VRM
3. Common
5. Gain Control
1.
Response Level
2. Gain Min Preset
3. Gain Max Preset
6. Sea Control
1. Response Level
2. Sea Min Preset
3. Sea Max Preset
7. Rain Control
1. Response Level
2. Rain Min Preset
A-19
Setting Contents
0 – 255
1 – 5
1
– 5
1 – 5
1 – 5
1 – 5
1 – 5
0
– 127
128
– 255
1
– 5
0 – 127
128 – 255
1 – 5
0 – 127
S/N 0 ° 00.0000
’ – 90 ° 00.0000
’
E/W 0 ° 00.0000
’ – 180 ° 00.0000
’
0 – 8191
00:00:00 – 23:59:59
2010/01/01 – 2099/12/31
AUTO / Manual
283.5 – 325.0
50bps / 100bps / 200bps
AUTO / Manual
Off / On
Off / On
120 – 138
Off / LORAN A / LORAN C
1S1 / 1S2 / 1S3 / 1S4 / 1S6 / 1L0 / 1L1 / 1L4 / 1L5 / 2S0 / 2S1 / 2S2 / 2S3 /
2S4 / 2S5 / 2S6 / 2S7 / 2H4 / 2H5 / 2H6
1S1 / 1S2 / 1S3 / 1S4 / 1S6 / 1L0 / 1L1 / 1L4 / 1L5 / 2S0 / 2S1 / 2S2 / 2S3 /
2S4 / 2S5 / 2S6 / 2S7 / 2H4 / 2H5 / 2H6
0.0 - 9.9
0.0 - 9.9
4990 / 5930 / 5970 / 5980 / 5990 / 6730 / 6731 / 6780 / 7001 / 7030 / 7170 /
7270 / 7430 / 7499 / 7930 / 7950 / 7960 / 7970 / 7980 / 7990 / 8000 / 8290 /
8390 / 8830 / 8930 / 8970 / 8990 / 9007 / 9610 / 9930 / 9940 / 9960 / 9970 /
9980 / 9990
0 – 99
0 – 99
0.0 – 9.9
0.0 – 9.9
Item
3. Rain Max Preset
11. Maintenance
1. Reset Partial
1.RADAR Echo
2. Function Setting
3. Basic Adjustment
4. Main Menu
5. Adjust Menu
6. System Information 1
7. System Information 2
8. All Menu
2. Reset All
3.System Time Clear
4. Scanner Time Clear
1. Operation Time Clear
2. TX Time Clear
3. Motor Time Clear
4. Scanner -> Display
5. Display -> Scanner
5. Table Update
1. STC Curve
2. Color
3. Initial Value
1. RADAR Echo
2. Function Setting
3. Basic Adjustment
4. Main Menu
5. Adjust Menu
6. System Information 1
7. System Information 2
8. All Menu
4. Insert Language
5. Echo Simulation
6. Internal Setting
1. Internal Memory to USB
1. RADAR Echo
2. Function Setting
3. Basic Adjustment
4. Main Menu
5. Adjust Menu
6. System Information 1
7. System Information 2
8. All Menu
2. USB to Internal Memory
1. RADAR Echo
2. Function Setting
3. Basic Adjustment
4. Main Menu
5. Adjust Menu
6. System Information 1
7. System Information 2
8. All Menu
7. USB Format
12. System Setting
1. Master/Slave/Demo
128 – 255
Master / Slave / Demo
Setting Contents
APPENDIX
A-20
APPENDIX
Item
2. Own Outline
1. On/Off
2. Input Outline Size
1. Full Length
2. Full Width
3. GPS Antenna(Length)
4. GPS Antenna(Side)
5. Scanner(Length)
6. Scanner(Side)
3. Barge Outline
1. On/Off
2. Input Outline Size
1. Full Length
2. Full Width
3. Barge Position(Length)
4. Barge Position(Side)
4. Bearing Marker
1. Bearing
2. Bearing Step
5. Operation Numeric Display
6 Unit
1. Range
2. Distance
3. Speed
4. Depth
5. User Depth
6. Temperature
7. Wind
8. Size/Location Setting
7. Move Own Ship
1. Ship ’s Move
8. Range
1. NM
1. 0.0625NM
2. 0.125NM
3. 0.25NM
4. 0.5NM
5. 0.75NM
6. 1NM
7. 1.5NM
8. 2NM
9. 3NM
10. 4NM
11. 6NM
12. 8NM
13. 12NM
14. 16NM
15. 24NM
16. 32NM
17. 48NM
18. 64NM
19. 72NM
2. km
1. 0.15km
2. 0.3km
A-21
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On m/s / km/h / kt / Bft. m / ft
Lat/Lon / COG/SOG
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
0.0 - 600.0
0.0 - 200.0
0.0 - 600.0
-100.0 - +100.0
0.0 - 600.0
-100.0 - +100.0
Off / On
0.0 - 600.0
0.0 - 200.0
-600.0 - +600.0
-200.0 - +200.0
Off / On
0
– 99
Off / On
NM / km / sm
NM / km / sm kn / km/h / mph ft / fm/ m / user
0.0001 - 9.9999
℃ / ゚ F
Setting Contents
Item
3. 0.5km
4. 0.8km
5. 1.2km
6. 1.6km
7. 2km
8. 4km
9. 8km
10. 16km
11. 32km
3. sm
1. 0.0625sm
2. 0.125sm
3. 0.25sm
4. 0.5sm
5. 0.75sm
6. 1sm
7. 1.5sm
8. 2sm
9. 3sm
10. 4sm
11. 6sm
12. 8sm
13. 12sm
14. 16sm
15. 24sm
16. 32sm
17. 48sm
18. 64sm
19. 72sm
13. Display Screen
1. Standby Numeric Display
2. Day
1.Keyboard Unit Brilliance
2. Outer PPI
1. Color
2. Brilliance
3. Inner PPI
1. Color
2. Brilliance
4. Character
1. Color
2. Brilliance
5. RADAR Echo
1. Color
2. Brilliance
6. RADAR Trails(Time)
1. Color
2. Brilliance
7. RADAR Trails(All)
1. Color
2. Brilliance
8. Own Ship ’s/Berge
1. Color
2. Brilliance
9. Own Ship ’s Vector
Setting Contents
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Black / Blue / Navy Blue / White
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Blue / Navy Blue / Black / White
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
White / Cyan / Orange / Green / Black / Red / Amber
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Yellow / Green / Orange / Pink / Red / White / Color / Custom
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Cyan / White / Green
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Dark Green / Gray / Navy Blue
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
White / Cyan / Green / Red
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
APPENDIX
A-22
APPENDIX
Item
1. Color
2. Brilliance
10. Target( TT / AIS )
1. Color
2. Brilliance
11. EBL/VRM/Parallel
1. Color
2. Brilliance
12. Range Ring
1. Color
2. Brilliance
13. Cursor
1. Color
2. Brilliance
14. Guard Zone
1. Color
2. Brilliance
3. Dusk
4. Night
5. Numeric Display
1. Numeric Display (0)
A-23
2. Numeric Display (1)
3. Numeric Display (2)
4. Numeric Display (3)
5. Numeric Display (4)
6. Numeric Display (5)
7. Numeric Display (6)
8. Numeric Display (7)
9. Numeric Display (8)
10. Numeric Display (9)
11. Numeric Display (10)
12. Numeric Display (11)
13. Numeric Display (12)
14. Tune Gauge
15. Pulse Width
16. Trails
Setting Contents
White / Cyan / Green / Red
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Cyan / Green / White
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Cyan / Green / Orange / Black / Pink / White
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Cyan / Orange / Red / Green / White / Amber
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Red / Yellow / Pink / White
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
White / Green / Orange / Black / Red
Level1 / Level2 / Level3 / Level4
Same as “Day”
Same as
“Day”
Off
Own Heading/Speed
Own AXG Course/Speed
Own Latitude/Longitude
ROT/Rudder
Depth/Temperature
Relative Wide
True Wind(Head)
Waypoint Bearing/Distance
Waypoint Latitude/Longitude
Waypoint Arrival Time
Cursor Bearing/Distance
Cursor Latitude/Longitude
Cursor Arrival Time
MOB Bearing/Distance
MOB Latitude/Longitude
MOB Arrival Time
EBL1/VRM1
EBL2/VRM2
Parallel Cursor
TT Bearing/Distance
TT CRS/SPD
TT CPA/TCPA
AIS Bearing/Distance
AIS COG/SOG
AIS CPA/TCPA
Rate of Turn
Rudder
Depth
Temperature
Same as “Numeric Display (0)”
Same as “Numeric Display (0)”
Same as “Numeric Display (0)”
Same as
“Numeric Display (0)”
Same as
“Numeric Display (0)”
Same as
“Numeric Display (0)”
Same as
“Numeric Display (0)”
Same as “Numeric Display (0)”
Same as “Numeric Display (0)”
Same as “Numeric Display (0)”
Same as “Numeric Display (0)”
Same as “Numeric Display (0)”
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Item
17. Alarm Area1
18. Alarm Area2
19. IR
20. Target Enhance
21. Gain/Sea/Rain
22. Own Ship Trails
23. Vector Length
24. Function
25. Process
26. Zoom
27. System Status
28. Bearing Marker
29. Wind direction/Speed
30. Wind mode
6. Wide Screen
7. Time
14. RADAR Echo Color
1. Yellow
2. Green
3. Orange
4. Color
5. Custom
6. Adjust Echo Color
15. Error Alarm Mask
1. Scanner
1. Scanner(Time Out)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
2. Scanner(Data)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
3. Scanner(Safety Switch)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
4. Scanner(AZI)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
5. Scanner(HL)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
6. Scanner(MHV)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
7. Scanner(Heater)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
8. Scanner(Reverse)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
9. Scanner(Video)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
10. Scanner(Trigger)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
Setting Contents
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / Scale / Scale/Numeric
Off / On
Ture / Relative
Standard / Wide
None / UTC / LT
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Yellow1 / Yellow2 / Yellow3
Green1 / Green2 / Green3
Orange1 / Orange2 / Orange3
Color1 / Color2 / Color3
Custom1 / Custom2 / Custom3
Pattern1 / Pattern2 / Pattern3
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
APPENDIX
A-24
APPENDIX
Item
11. Scanner(Fan 1)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
12. Scanner(Fan 2)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
13. Scanner(Motor)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
2. Display Unit
1. Display Unit(Video)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
2. Display Unit(Trigger)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
3. Display Unit(AZI)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
4. Display Unit(HL)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
5. Display Unit(DSP)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
3. Connection Device
1. Panel1(Time out)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
2. GPS(Time Out)
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
4. RX Data
1. GYRO/Compass
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
2. Log/2Log
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
3. Course/Speed
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
4. Depth
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
5. Temperature
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
6. Wind
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
7. Tide
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
8. Rate Of Turn
A-25
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Setting Contents
Item
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
9. Rudder
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
10. Waypoint
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
11. Lat/Lon
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
12. Date
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
13. Datum
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
14. Status
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
15. HDOP
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
16. AIS
1. Alarm Detection
2. Detection Time
16. Test ・ System Information
1. System Information
2. System Time
3. Scanner Information
4. Hardware Information
5. Error Log
1. Display
2. Erase
6. Line Monitor
7. Self Test
1. Key Test
2. Buzzer Test
3. Key Light Test
4. Monitor Display Test
1. Pattern1
2. Pattern2
3. Pattern3
4. Pattern4
5. Pattern5
6. Pattern6
7. Pattern7
8. Pattern8
1.Red
2.Green
3.Bule
4.Display
5. Memory Test
6. Line Test
7. Scanner Test
0
– 255
0
– 255
0
– 255
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Off / On
0 – 999sec
Setting Contents
APPENDIX
A-26
APPENDIX
Item
17. Network
1. Network Function
2. IP Address
Off / On
IP Address Input
3. RADAR echo transmission setting
1. RADER echo transmission function Off / On
2. Multicast IP
3. Output Form
4. Data Format
IP Input
Quadrant / Octant / Sweep
Normal / Compressed
18. NMEA2000
1. NMEA2000 Out
2. NMEA2000 PGN
1. Water Speed (128259)
2. Water depth (128267)
3. XTE (129283)
4. NAV. data (129284)
5. NAV. Route/WP (129285)
6. COG & SOG (129026)
7. GNSS position (129029)
8. Water temp (130310)
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Setting Contents
A-27
APPENDIX
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
URL Head office : http://www.jrc.co.jp/eng/
Marine Service Department
1-7-32 Tatsumi, Koto-ku, Tokyo 135-0053, Japan
e-mail : [email protected]
One-call :+81-50-3786-9201
ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
CODE No.7ZPRD1007 DEC. 2019 Edition 3
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 3 PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION
- 4 FIRST-AID TREATMENTS
- 12 PREFACE
- 12 CHECKING THE SUPPLIED ITEMS
- 13 BEFORE OPERATION
- 17 PRECAUTIONS
- 22 WARNING LABEL MOUNTING POINT
- 24 PACKING LIST
- 30 EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
- 35 CONTENTS
- 44 GLOSSARY
- 49 Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
- 49 1.1 OVERVIEW
- 50 1.2 INSTALLATION OF THE DISPLAY UNIT
- 50 1.2.1 SELECTING THE INSTALLATION POSITION
- 50 1.2.2 SELECTION OF DISPLAY MOUNTING
- 51 1.2.3 DIMENSIONAL DRAWING OF DISPLAY MOUNTING
- 53 1.2.4 EXAMPLES OF DISPLAY MOUNTING
- 57 1.2.5 POWER CABLE INSTALLATION
- 58 1.2.6 EXTERNAL NAVIGATIONAL SIGNAL CONNECTION
- 60 1.3 INSTALLATION OF THE SCANNER UNIT
- 60 1.3.1 SELECTING THE INSTALLATION POSITION
- 61 1.3.2 LOWEST SCANNER INSTALLATION HEIGHT
- 62 1.3.3 MOUNTING RACK AND MAST FOR THE SCANNER
- 62 1.3.4 SCANNER AND THE SURROUNDING STRUCTURAL OBJECTS
- 63 1.3.5 ENSURING VIEW ANGLE
- 65 1.3.6 CONFIRM MOUNTING BASE BEFORE INSTALL
- 65 NKE-2043 2FT SCANNER
- 66 NKE-2063A/AHS 3.9FT SCANNER
- 67 NKE-2103-4/4HS 4FT SCANNER
- 68 NKE-2103-6/6HS 6FT SCANNER
- 70 1.4 CONNECTING THE INSTALLATION CABLE
- 71 1.4.1 NKE-2043 SCANNER (2 FEET)
- 75 1.4.2 NKE-2063A SCANNER (3.9 FEET)
- 77 1.4.3 NKE-2063AHS SCANNER (3.9 FEET)
- 79 1.4.4 NKE-2103-4/6 SCANNER (4 FEET/6 FEET)
- 81 Chapter 2 THE BASIC OPERATION
- 81 2.1 PANEL AND SCREEN DISPLAY LAYOUT
- 82 2.2 OPERATION UNIT
- 86 2.3 POWER ON/OFF
- 87 2.4 SCREEN LAYOUT
- 87 2.4.1 STANDBY SCREEN
- 88 2.4.2 TRANSMISSION SCREEN
- 89 2.5 MULTI CONTROL OPERATION
- 91 2.5.1 FUNCTION OVERVIEW OF MULTI CONTROL MENU
- 92 Chapter 3 ADJUST THE RADAR ECHO
- 92 3.1 CHANGE RANGE
- 92 3.2 SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT (GAIN)
- 94 3.3 SEA CLUTTER SUPPRESSION (SEA)
- 95 3.4 RAIN/SNOW CLUTTER SUPPRESSION (RAIN)
- 96 3.5 SCREEN BRILLIANCE (BRILL)
- 98 Chapter 4 VRM AND EBL FUNCTION
- 98 4.1 OPERATION OF VRM, EBL
- 98 4.2 EXAMPLE OF VRM FUNCTION
- 99 4.3 EXAMPLE OF EBL FUNCTION
- 100 Chapter 5 VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
- 100 5.1 PARALLEL CURSOR FUNCTION
- 103 5.2 MOB FUNCTION (MAN OVERBOARD)
- 104 5.3 ANCHOR WATCH FUNCTION
- 106 5.4 VECTOR LENGTH
- 107 5.5 RADAR TRAILS
- 107 5.5.1 SETUP THE RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL
- 108 5.6 AIS OPERATIONS
- 110 5.6.1 AIS LIST
- 112 5.7 TT OPERATIONS
- 116 5.8 OFF-CENTER FUNCTION
- 117 5.9 MARK FUNCTION
- 120 5.10 LINE FUNCTION
- 123 5.11 OWNSHIP MARK FUNCTION
- 125 5.12 USER OPTION KEYS
- 126 5.13 MODE FUNCTION
- 128 5.14 SETTING DISPLAY BRILLIANCE AND COLOR
- 129 5.15 CURSOR FUNCTION
- 130 5.16 RADAR ECHO SETTING
- 131 5.16.1 PULSE WIDTH
- 131 5.16.2 IR (INTERFERENCE REJECTION)
- 132 5.16.3 TARGET ENHANCE
- 132 5.16.4 PROCESS
- 132 5.16.5 ZOOM MODE
- 133 5.16.6 VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
- 133 5.16.7 VIDEO LATITUDE
- 134 5.17 TUNE
- 135 5.18 MARKER
- 135 5.18.1 EBL SETTING
- 136 5.18.2 PARALLEL CURSOR
- 137 5.18.3 VRM UNIT
- 137 5.18.4 CURSOR MODE
- 138 5.18.5 RANGE RING
- 139 5.19 SET OWN SHIP MOVEMENT
- 140 5.20 TRAILS SETTING
- 141 5.20.1 THRESHOLD
- 141 5.20.2 TIME/ALL COMBINE
- 141 5.20.3 TRAILS MODE
- 142 5.21 VECTOR
- 143 5.21.1 VECTOR MODE
- 143 5.21.2 DISPLAY OWN SHIP’S VECTOR
- 143 5.21.3 OWN SHIP VECTOR LINE WIDTH
- 144 5.22 OFFCENTER SETTING
- 145 5.23 FUNCTION SETTING
- 146 5.23.1 FUNCTION ENABLE/DISABLE
- 146 5.23.2 AUTO STC/FTC
- 147 5.23.3 TRAILS INTERVAL
- 147 5.23.4 ANTENNA HEIGHT
- 147 5.23.5 SAVE PRESENT STATE
- 147 5.23.6 INITIALIZE
- 148 5.24 AIS/TT
- 149 5.24.1 FUNCTION ON/OFF
- 149 5.24.2 CPA LIMIT
- 149 5.24.3 TCPA LIMIT
- 149 5.24.4 CPA RING
- 149 5.24.5 TARGET NUMBER DISPLAY
- 150 5.24.6 TARGET NUMBER ALLOCATION
- 150 5.24.7 TLL TARGET NUMBER ALLOCATION
- 150 5.24.8 ALR ALARM FROM AIS
- 150 5.24.9 AIS DISPLAY TARGET
- 150 5.24.10 AIS DESTINATION SHIP
- 150 5.24.11 AIS RETRIEVED VESSEL
- 150 5.24.12 AIS FILTER
- 151 5.25 GUARD ZONE
- 152 5.25.1 ZONE ALARM LEVEL
- 152 5.25.2 ZONE MODE
- 152 5.25.3 MAKE ZONE
- 153 5.26 WAYPOINT DISPLAY
- 154 5.27 CHART
- 154 5.27.1 TYPE
- 155 5.27.2 DISPLAY
- 155 5.27.3 SYMBOL
- 155 5.27.4 PALETTE
- 155 5.27.5 SHOW EXTEND DATA
- 156 5.28 SET CHART OPERATION
- 157 5.29 MARK SETTING
- 157 5.29.1 MARK SIZE
- 158 5.29.2 MARK COLOR
- 158 5.29.3 MARK TYPE
- 158 5.29.4 DISPLAY MARK COLOR
- 158 5.29.5 DISPLAY MARK TYPE
- 158 5.29.6 MARK LIST
- 160 5.30 OWNSHIP MARK SETTING
- 160 5.30.1 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK SIZE
- 161 5.30.2 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK COLOR
- 161 5.30.3 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK TYPE
- 161 5.30.4 DISPLAY MARK COLOR
- 161 5.30.5 DISPLAY MARK TYPE
- 161 5.30.6 OWN SHIP POSITION MARK LIST
- 163 5.31 LINE SETTING
- 163 5.31.1 LINE COLOR
- 163 5.31.2 LINE TYPE
- 164 5.31.3 DISPLAY LINE COLOR
- 164 5.31.4 DISPLAY LINE TYPE
- 164 5.31.5 LINE LIST
- 166 5.32 OWN TRACK SETTING
- 166 5.32.1 OWN TRACK RECORD ON/OFF
- 166 5.32.2 OWN TRACK RECORD DISPLAY ON/OFF
- 167 5.32.3 OWN TRACK COLOR
- 167 5.32.4 OWN TRACK TYPE
- 167 5.32.5 OWN TRACK INTERVAL
- 167 5.32.6 DISPLAY OWN TRACK COLOR
- 167 5.32.7 DISPLAY OWN TRACK TYPE
- 167 5.32.8 CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR/TYPE
- 168 5.33 FILE OPERATION
- 168 5.33.1 SAVE
- 168 5.33.2 LOAD
- 169 5.33.3 DELETE
- 169 5.34 SCREEN CAPTURE
- 170 5.34.1 CAPTURE FUNCTION
- 170 5.34.2 SET MANUAL KEY
- 170 5.34.3 INTERVAL
- 171 5.35 TIMED TX
- 171 5.35.1 TIMED TX
- 171 5.35.2 TX TIME
- 172 5.35.3 STANDBY TIME
- 172 5.36 TLL TX "USER2"
- 172 5.37 CERTIFICATION INFORMATION
- 173 Chapter 6 OPTION AND OTHER FUNCTIONS
- 173 6.1 NMEA CABLE
- 176 6.2 EXTERNAL MONITOR OUTPUT
- 176 6.3 RECTIFIER UNIT
- 177 Chapter 7 INITIAL SETTINGS
- 178 7.1 LANGUAGE SELECTION
- 178 7.2 BEARING ADJUSTMENT
- 178 7.3 RANGE ADJUSTMENT
- 179 7.4 TUNING ADJUSTMENT
- 180 7.5 ANTENNA HEIGHT SET UP
- 181 7.6 COMMUNICATION PORT SETUP
- 182 7.6.1 BAUD RATE
- 182 7.6.2 RX SENTENCE
- 183 7.6.3 RX PORT
- 183 7.6.4 TX PORT
- 184 7.6.5 TX DATA FORMAT
- 184 7.6.6 TARGET INFORMATION TX
- 185 7.7 I/F DEVICE
- 186 7.7.1 HEADING EQUIPMENT
- 186 7.7.2 MANUAL HEADING
- 186 7.7.3 SPEED EQUIPMENT
- 186 7.7.4 MANUAL SPEED
- 186 7.7.5 MAGNETIC COMPASS
- 187 7.8 JRC GPS
- 188 7.8.1 NMEA VERSION
- 189 7.8.2 GPS SETTING
- 190 7.8.2.1 CORRECTION METHOD
- 190 7.8.2.2 FIX MODE
- 190 7.8.2.3 ELEVATE MASK
- 190 7.8.2.4 HDOP
- 190 7.8.2.5 SMOOTHING LAT/LON
- 190 7.8.2.6 SMOOTHING SOG
- 190 7.8.2.7 SMOOTHING COG
- 190 7.8.2.8 SMOOTHING1
- 191 7.8.2.9 SMOOTHING2
- 191 7.8.2.10 RAIM ACCURACY LEVEL
- 191 7.8.2.11 EXCLUSION SATELLITE
- 191 7.8.2.12 GPS SETTING SEND DATA
- 192 7.8.2.13 GPS ADJUST
- 193 7.8.3 BEACON SETTING
- 194 7.8.4 SBAS SETTING
- 195 7.8.5 GPS STATUS DISPLAY
- 195 7.8.6 LORAN SETTING
- 196 Chapter 8 DETAIL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
- 196 8.1 RADAR ECHO
- 197 8.1.1 NOISE LEVEL
- 197 8.1.2 MAIN BANG SUPPRESSION
- 198 8.1.3 TARGET ENHANCE LEVEL
- 198 8.1.4 GAIN
- 198 8.1.5 SEA
- 199 8.1.6 RAIN
- 200 8.2 TRAILS
- 200 8.2.1 TRAILS SUPPRESSION DISTANCE
- 201 8.2.2 MAX INTERVAL
- 201 8.2.3 RANGE LIMIT
- 202 8.3 TT
- 203 8.4 SCANNER
- 204 8.4.1 SLOPE CORRECTION
- 204 8.4.2 PULSE REPETITION FREQUENCY FINE TUNING (PRF FINE TUNING)
- 204 8.4.3 STAGGER TRIGGER
- 204 8.4.4 SCANNER ROTATION SPEED
- 204 8.4.5 PRF OUTPUT MODE
- 205 8.4.6 SAFETY SWITCH
- 205 8.4.7 TUNE PEAK ADJUSTMENT
- 205 8.4.8 TUNE INDICATOR LEVEL
- 205 8.4.9 STOP ANTENNA IN THE SPECIFIED DIRECTION
- 206 8.4.10 ICE CLASS STANDBY MODE
- 206 8.5 CONTROL
- 206 8.5.1 MULTI CONTROL MENU TIME OUT
- 207 8.5.2 CROSS KEY GAIN
- 207 8.5.3 MULTI CONTROL
- 207 8.5.4 GAIN CONTROL/SEA CONTROL/RAIN CONTROL
- 208 8.6 BUZZER
- 209 8.7 MAINTENANCE
- 210 8.7.1 RESET PARTIAL
- 211 8.7.2 RESET ALL
- 211 8.7.3 SYSTEM TIME CLEAR
- 212 8.7.4 SCANNER TIME CLEAR
- 212 8.7.5 TABLE UPDATE
- 213 8.7.6 INTERNAL SETTING
- 214 8.7.6.1 INTERNAL MEMORY TO USB
- 214 8.7.6.2 USB TO INTERNAL MEMORY
- 215 8.7.7 USB FORMAT
- 216 8.8 SYSTEM SETTING
- 217 8.8.1 MASTER/SLAVE/DEMO
- 217 8.8.2 OWN OUTLINE
- 217 8.8.3 BARGE OUTLINE
- 217 8.8.4 BEARING MARKER
- 217 8.8.5 OPERATION NUMERIC DISPLAY
- 218 8.8.6 UNIT
- 218 8.8.7 MOVE OWN SHIP
- 219 8.8.8 RANGE
- 220 8.9 DISPLAY SCREEN
- 221 8.9.1 STANDBY NUMERIC DISPLAY
- 221 8.9.2 DISPLAY COLOR
- 222 8.9.3 OPERATION NUMERIC DISPLAY
- 223 8.9.4 WIDE SCREEN
- 223 8.9.5 TIME
- 224 8.10 RADAR ECHO COLOR
- 225 8.11 ERROR ALARM MASK
- 226 8.11.1 SCANNER
- 226 8.11.2 DISPLAY UNIT
- 227 8.11.3 CONNECTION DEVICE
- 227 8.11.4 RX DATA
- 228 8.12 NETWORK
- 229 8.12.1 NETWORK FUNCTION
- 229 8.12.2 IP ADDRESS
- 229 8.12.3 RADAR ECHO TRANSMISSION SETTING
- 230 8.12.3.1 RADAR ECHO TRANSMISSION FUNCTION
- 230 8.12.3.2 MULTICAST IP
- 230 8.12.3.3 OUTPUT FORM
- 230 8.12.3.4 DATA FORMAT
- 231 8.13 NMEA2000
- 232 8.13.1 NMEA2000 OUT
- 232 8.13.2 NMEA2000 PGN
- 233 Chapter 9 MAINTENANCE AND CHECK
- 233 9.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
- 234 9.2 MAINTENANCE OF EACH UNIT
- 234 9.2.1 SCANNER UNIT NKE-2043, 2063A/AHS, 2103-4/4HS/6/6HS
- 236 9.2.2 DISPLAY NCD-2364
- 237 9.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
- 238 9.3.1 TEST-SYSTEM INFORMATION
- 238 9.3.2 SYSTEM INFORMATION
- 238 9.3.3 SYSTEM TIME
- 239 9.3.4 SCANNER INFORMATION
- 239 9.3.5 HARDWARE INFORMATION
- 239 9.3.6 ERROR LOG
- 239 9.3.7 LINE MONITOR
- 240 9.3.8 SELF TEST
- 240 9.3.8.1 KEY TEST
- 240 9.3.8.2 MONITOR DISPLAY TEST
- 242 9.3.9 SOFTWARE UPDATE
- 243 9.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
- 244 9.4.1 PARTS REQUIRED FOR PERIODIC REPLACEMENT
- 245 9.5 FAULT FINDING
- 245 9.5.1 ALARMS AND OTHER DISPLAY LISTS
- 250 9.6 TROUBLE SHOOTING
- 250 9.6.1 SPECIAL PARTS
- 251 9.6.2 CIRCUIT BLOCK TO BE REPAIRED
- 254 Chapter 10 AFTER-SALE SERVICE
- 254 10.1 KEEPING PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
- 254 10.2 WHEN YOU REQUEST FOR REPAIR
- 254 10.3 RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE
- 255 10.4 RADAR FAILURE CHECK LIST
- 256 Chapter 11 DISPOSAL
- 256 11.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT
- 256 11.2 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON
- 256 11.3 CHINA ROHS
- 257 Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS
- 258 12.1 SCANNER DIMENSION
- 258 12.1.1 NKE-2043
- 259 12.1.2 NKE-2063A/AHS
- 260 12.1.3 NKE-2103-4/4HS
- 261 12.1.4 NKE-2103-6/6HS
- 262 12.2 DISPLAY DIMENSION
- 262 12.2.1 NCD-2364
- 263 12.3 EQUIPMENT OUTLINE
- 263 12.3.1 CONFIGULATION
- 263 12.3.2 FEATURE
- 263 12.3.3 RADAR MODEL
- 264 12.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
- 266 12.5 SCANNER
- 266 12.5.1 SCANNER (NKE-2043) SPECIFICATION
- 267 12.5.2 SCANNER (NKE-2063A/AHS) SPECIFICATION
- 268 12.5.3 SCANNER (NKE-2103-4/6/4HS/6HS) SPECIFICATION
- 269 12.6 DISPLAY
- 269 12.6.1 INTEGRATED DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-2364)
- 271 12.6.2 OPERATIONAL PART
- 272 12.6.3 AIS FUNCTION (STANDARD BUILT IN)
- 272 12.6.4 TT FUNCTION (STANDARD BUILT IN)
- 273 12.7 INPUT/ OUTPUT SIGNAL
- 273 12.7.1 INPUT ENABLE SIGNAL
- 275 12.7.2 OUTPUT POSSIBLE SIGNAL
- 275 12.7.3 STANDARD CONFIGURATION
- 275 12.7.4 OPTION CABLE
- 276 APPENDIX
- 276 NKE-2043 SCANNER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
- 277 NKE-2063A SCANNER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
- 278 NKE-2063AHS SCANNER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
- 279 NKE-2103-4/4HS/6/6HS SCANNER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
- 280 NCD-2364 DISPLAY UNIT INTER CONNECTION DIAGRAM
- 281 JMA-3400 PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM
- 282 JMA-3404 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
- 283 JMA-3406/HS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
- 284 JMA-3411-4/4HS/6/6HS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
- 286 MENU FUNCTION LIST
- 303 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY